228-90475V Sil-20a 20ac 20aht 20acht Im en

228-90475V
Apr. 2022
AUTOSAMPLER
FOR SHIMADZU HIGH PERFORMANCE
LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPH
SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Read the instruction manual thoroughly before you use the product.
Keep this instruction manual for future reference.
This page is intentionally left blank.
Introduction
Introduction
Read this manual thoroughly before using this instrument.
Thank you for purchasing this instrument. This manual describes: the installation,
operation, hardware validation, cautions for use, and details on the accessories and
options. Read the manual thoroughly, and use the instrument in accordance with the
instructions described in the manual. Keep this manual for future reference.
IMPORTANT • If the user or usage location changes, ensure that this Instruction Manual is
always kept together with the product.
• If this documentation or the warning labels on the instrument become lost or
damaged, promptly obtain replacements from your Shimadzu
representative.
• To ensure safe operation, read the Safety Instructions before using the
product.
• To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative if product
installation, adjustment, or re-installation (after the product is moved) is
required.
Notice • This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without written
permission from Shimadzu Corporation. Since Shimadzu products are
frequently upgraded and improved, information in this publication is subject
to change without notice. We appreciate notification of any errors or
omissions.
• Some of illustrations in this manual may differ from those of your instrument.
Copyright • Copyright © 2004-2015 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved. This

publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without written
permission from Shimadzu Corporation. Since Shimadzu products are
frequently upgraded and improved, information in this publication is subject
to change without notice. We appreciate notification of any errors or
omissions.
• Other company names and product names mentioned in this manual are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. The TM
and ® symbols are omitted in this manual.
SIL-20A/20AC I
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
Models of this This manual uses the following designations for the models (A and C models)
of this instrument.
instrument
Model Instrument name Part No.
S228-45006-31
S228-45006-41
S228-45006-32
S228-45006-42
SIL-20A S228-45006-36
S228-45006-38
S228-45006-46
S228-45006-48
A models S228-45006-58
(no sample cooler) S228-45119-31
S228-45119-41
S228-45119-32
S228-45119-42
SIL-20AHT S228-45119-36
S228-45119-38
S228-45119-46
S228-45119-48
S228-45119-58
S228-45007-31
S228-45007-41
S228-45007-32
S228-45007-42
SIL-20AC S228-45007-36
S228-45007-38
S228-45007-46
S228-45007-48
C models S228-45007-58
(with a sample cooler) S228-45120-31
S228-45120-41
S228-45120-32
S228-45120-42
SIL-20ACHT S228-45120-36
S228-45120-38
S228-45120-46
S228-45120-48
S228-45120-58
© 2006-2022 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.
Original version is approved in English.
II SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Warranty and After-Sales Service
Warranty and After-Sales Service
Warranty 1. Period:
Please consult your Shimadzu representative for information about the extent
of the warranty.
2. Description:
If a product/part failure occurs for reasons attributable to Shimadzu during the
warranty period, Shimadzu will repair or replace the product/part free of
charge. However, in the case of products which are usually available on the
market only for a short time, such as personal computers and their
peripherals/parts, Shimadzu may not be able to provide identical replacement
products.
3. Limitation of Liability:
1) In no event will Shimadzu be liable for any lost revenue, profit or data, or
for special, indirect, consequential, incidental or punitive damages,
however caused regardless of the theory of liability, arising out of or
related to the use of or inability to use the product, even if Shimadzu has
been advised of the possibility of such damage.
2) In no event will Shimadzu's liability to you, whether in contract, tort
(including negligence), or otherwise, exceed the amount you paid for the
product.
4. Exceptions:
Failures caused by the following are excluded from the warranty, even if they
occur during the warranty period.
1) Improper product handling
2) Repairs or modifications performed by parties other than Shimadzu or
Shimadzu designated companies
3) Product use in combination with hardware or software other than that
designated by Shimadzu
4) Computer viruses leading to device failures and damage to data and
software, including the product's basic software
5) Power failures, including power outages and sudden voltage drops,
leading to device failures and damage to data and software, including the
product's basic software
6) Turning OFF the product without following the proper shutdown
procedure leading to device failures and damage to data and software,
including the product's basic software
7) Reasons unrelated to the product itself
8) Product use in harsh environments, such as those subject to high
temperatures or humidity levels, corrosive gases, or strong vibrations
9) Fires, earthquakes, or any other act of nature, contamination by
radioactive or hazardous substances, or any other force majeure event,
including wars, riots, and crimes
SIL-20A/20AC III
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
10) Product movement or transportation after installation

11) Consumable items
Note: Recording media such as floppy disks and CD-ROMs are
considered consumable items.
 If there is a document such as a warranty provided with the product, or
there is a separate contract agreed upon that includes warranty
conditions, the provisions of those documents shall apply.
After-Sales Service If any problem occurs with this instrument, perform an inspection and take
appropriate corrective action as described in the Section "6 Troubleshooting".
If the problem persists, or the symptoms are not covered in the troubleshooting
section, contact your Shimadzu representative.
Replacement Parts Replacement parts for this instrument will be available for a period of seven
(7) years after the discontinuation of the product. Thereafter, such parts may
Availability
cease to be available. Note, however, that the availability of parts not
manufactured by Shimadzu shall be determined by the relevant
manufacturers.
Hardware Validation Each LC component and the entire LC system should be checked
periodically to ensure that they function normally, or the analysis data may
not be reliable. To this end, it is necessary to carry out periodic hardware
validation and keep records of the validation. There are two types of
hardware validation - component validation and system validation.
The purpose of component validation is to check that the individual
components of the system function normally, while the system validation
checks that the system as a whole (the several components in combination)
functions normally.
Before shipment from the factory, this instrument was rigorously inspected.
The results are summarized in the Inspection Certificate accompanying the
instrument. To inspect the instrument performance after installation, repeat
the Hardware Validation as described in "7 Hardware Validation".
"7 Hardware Validation" P. 7-1
Hardware Validation This is a contract under which a qualified Shimadzu-approved engineer

performs periodic component and system validation, and provides reports of
Contract
the results. Details of the contract can be obtained from your Shimadzu
representative.
IV SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions
• To ensure safe operation of the instrument, read these Safety Instructions carefully before use.
• Observe all of the WARNINGS and CAUTIONS described in this section. They are extremely important for
safety.
• In this manual, warnings and cautions are indicated using the following conventions;
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

WARNING avoided, could result in serious injury or possibly death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

CAUTION avoided, may result in minor to moderate injury or equipment
damage.
Emphasizes additional information that is provided to ensure

NOTE
the proper use of this product.
 Application Precautions
WARNING
This instrument is an autosampler for use with a high performance liquid
chromatography system.
Use this instrument ONLY for the intended purpose.
Using this instrument for any other purpose could cause accidents.
SIL-20A/20AC V
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
 Installation Site Precautions
WARNING
• The solvents used in high performance liquid
chromatograph are flammable and toxic. The room
where the instrument is installed should be well
ventilated; otherwise, solvent vapors could cause
poisoning or ignite and cause a fire.
• High performance liquid chromatograph uses large

amounts of flammable organic solvents. Use of open
flame in the vicinity of this instrument must be strictly
prohibited. Do not install the instrument in the same
room with any other equipment that emits or could
potentially emit sparks, since sparks could cause a fire.
Provide fire extinguishers for use in case of fire.
• Provide protective equipment near the instrument.

If solvent gets into the eyes or on the skin, it must be flushed away
immediately. Provide equipment, such as eye wash stations and
safety showers, as close to the instrument as possible.
CAUTION
• The weight of this instrument is approximately 27 kg in
case of A models or 30 kg in case of C models.
During installation, consider the entire weight combined
with other LC components.
The lab table on which this instrument is installed should be strong to
support the total weight of the LC system. It should be level, stable
and have depth of at least 600 mm.
Otherwise, the instrument could tip over or fall off the table.
At least
600 mm
• Keep at least 100 mm between the rear of the instrument
and the wall.
This allows for sufficient air circulation and ventilation from the grille
to provide cooling and prevent the instrument from overheating and
impairing the performance.
• Avoid installation sites that are exposed to corrosive

gases or excessive dust.
These adverse conditions may be detrimental to maintaining the
instrument performance and may shorten its service life.
VI SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Safety Instructions
 Installation Precautions
To ensure safe operation, contact your Shimadzu representative if product installation, adjustment, or re-
installation (after the product is moved) is required.
WARNING
• Take measures to prevent the instrument from falling in the event of an
earthquake or other disaster.
Strong vibrations could cause the instrument to fall over, resulting in injury.
• The power supply voltages and power consumptions of this instrument

are listed below. The power supply voltage of the instrument is indicated
on the label on the back of the instrument. Connect the instrument to a
power supply that complies with the capacity and use a power cord that
complies with the capacity;
otherwise, fire or electric shock could result. Check that the power supply voltage is
stable and that its current capacity is sufficient to operate all the components of the
system. If not, the instrument will not operate at its rated performance.
[SIL-20A]
Power Supply Voltage Power Rated Breaking
Part No. Frequency
(indicated on the instrument)*1 Consumption Capacity*2
S228-45006-31
AC100 V  10% (100 V)
S228-45006-41
S228-45006-32
AC110-120 V  10% (110-120 V)
S228-45006-42
S228-45006-36 100 VA 50/60 Hz 35 A
S228-45006-38
S228-45006-46 AC220-240 V  10% (220-240 V)
S228-45006-48
S228-45006-58
[SIL-20AC]
Part No. Frequency
S228-45007-31
AC100 V  10% (100 V)
S228-45007-41
S228-45007-32
AC110-120 V  10% (110-120 V)
S228-45007-42
S228-45007-36 300 VA 50/60 Hz 63 A
S228-45007-38
S228-45007-46 AC220-240 V  10% (220-240 V)
S228-45007-48
S228-45007-58
*1 Mains supply voltage fluctuations are not to exceed 10 % of the nominal supply voltage.
*2 Connect the instrument to a power outlet that is equipped with a circuit breaker that shuts off the current at the described value or less.
SIL-20A/20AC VII
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
WARNING
[SIL-20AHT]
Part No. Frequency
S228-45119-31
AC100 V  10% (100 V)
S228-45119-41
S228-45119-32
AC110-120 V  10% (110-120 V)
S228-45119-42
S228-45119-36 100 VA 50/60 Hz 35 A
S228-45119-38
S228-45119-46 AC220-240 V  10% (220-240 V)
S228-45119-48
S228-45119-58
[SIL-20ACHT]
Part No. Frequency
S228-45120-31
AC100 V  10% (100 V)
S228-45120-41
S228-45120-32
AC110-120 V  10% (110-120 V)
S228-45120-42
S228-45120-36 300 VA 50/60 Hz 63 A
S228-45120-38
S228-45120-46 AC220-240 V  10% (220-240 V)
S228-45120-48
S228-45120-58
WARNING
• Ground the instrument.
Grounding is necessary to prevent electric shock in the event of
an accident or electrical discharge, and important for ensuring
stable operation.
• To prevent electric shock and to maintain stability in

operation of the product, be sure to ground the
product.
The product will be grounded when the provided 3-wired power
plug is inserted into a 3-wired power socket equipped with a
ground terminal.
VIII SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Safety Instructions
WARNING
• Do not place heavy objects on the power cord, and
keep any hot items away.
The cord could be damaged, resulting in fire, electrical shock
or malfunction. If the cord becomes damaged, contact your
Shimadzu representative immediately.
• Do not modify the cord in any way. Do not bend it

excessively or pull on it.
The cord could be damaged, resulting in fire, electrical shock
or malfunction. If the cord becomes damaged, contact your
Shimadzu representative immediately.
CAUTION
• When installing the instrument, be careful not to pinch
your fingers between the system components, as this
could result in injury.
• When opening the doors, be careful not to pinch your

fingers as this could result in injury.
SIL-20A/20AC IX
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
 Operation Precautions
WARNING
• Take thorough measures to prevent buildup of
static electricity.
"Static Electricity Precautions" P.XIV
Static electricity could result in fires or explosions.
• Always wear protective gloves and protective

goggles when handling solvents and samples.
If solvent gets into the eyes, blindness could result.
Should solvent get into the eyes, flush immediately with
large amounts of water and get medical attention.
• Always wear protective gloves when handling

any toxic or biologically infectious samples.
• Never use a cracked reservoir bottle.

If a helium degassing unit is used, pressure is exerted on
the reservoir bottles and may cause cracks in the bottles.
It could break the reservoir bottles and cause injury.
• Do not use flammable sprays (hair sprays,

insecticide sprays, etc.) near the instrument.
They could ignite and cause a fire.
• Be careful not to apply liquid to office

equipment such as the PC as well as the
instrument.
• Before removing the inlet tubing, outlet tubing,

sample loops, needles or needle seals from the
high-pressure flow line, be sure to stop the
pump.
Removing any of these parts during high-pressure
pumping could cause the mobile phase to splash around.
X SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Safety Instructions
CAUTION
• Do not bend any tubing of the instrument at the same position repeatedly.
Stainless or PEEK resin tubing can be provided; in either tubing, the wall is thin so a rupture or cracks
are likely to occur, which might result in solvent leaks.
• For the models equipped with a sample cooler, turn off the sample cooler when the
instrument is not analyzing, and avoid cooling the sample for a long time.
In the event that dew condensation water gathers in the cooling unit, immediately wipe
it off.
The models equipped with a sample cooler have a dehumidifying function, which prevents dew
condensation in the vial, to be used when the sample needs cooling before analysis.
However, if cooling is performed for one week or longer, dew condensation water may gather in the
cooling unit (sample rack, rack plate, temperature sensor, etc.) due to moisture in the air. Allowing such
water to remain in the cooling unit (in particular, at the temperature sensor) for a long time could
shorten the service life of each part or lead to damage to the instrument.
"8.17 Maintenance for Continuous Use over Extended Periods" P. 8-50
SIL-20A/20AC XI
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
 Precautions for Instrument Inspection, Maintenance, Adjustment and Care
WARNING
• Unplug the instrument before inspection, maintenance, or
parts replacement.
Otherwise, electrical shock or short-circuit accidents could occur.
• Never remove the main cover.

This may cause injury or malfunction of the instrument.
The main cover does not need to be removed for routine
maintenance, inspection and adjustment. Have your Shimadzu
representative perform any repairs requiring removal of the main
cover.
• Replace fuses only with fuses of the proper type and

capacity.
Any other fuses could cause a fire.
• If the power cord plug gets dusty, remove the plug from
the power outlet and wipe away the dust with a dry cloth.
If dust is allowed to accumulate, fire could result.
• Replacement parts must be of the specifications given in

"1.4 Component Parts" or "9.5 Maintenance Parts".
Use of any other parts may result in instrument damage and
malfunction.
• If any water gets onto the instrument, wipe it away

immediately to prevent rust. Never use alcohol or thinner
solvents for cleaning the instrument.
They could cause discoloration.
• Dispose of the waste liquid properly and in accordance

with the instruction by your administrative department.
XII SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Safety Instructions
 In an Emergency
WARNING
Turn OFF the power switch at the front of the instrument in case of an emergency.
Also, when the instrument is used again, inspect the instrument and, if necessary, contact your Shimadzu
representative to request servicing.
 During a Power Outage
CAUTION
Take the following action in the event of a power outage.
1) Turn OFF the power switch at the front of the instrument.
2) After confirming all related items in this section "Installation Precautions" and "Operation Precautions",
use the standard startup procedure to start the instrument.
SIL-20A/20AC XIII
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
Static Electricity Precautions

Liquid chromatograph (LC) uses flammable organic solvent(s) as the mobile phase. LC systems are also
often used where large amount of flammable substances are present. Thus, an accident can produce large
scale damage. Operators must be constantly on guard against accidents involving fire or explosion.
The major cause of these accidents is static electricity. Devising preventative measures for static can be
difficult, because the symptoms before an accident vary and can be hard to detect, since such accidents
occur as a result of several simultaneous coincidences. Recommended methods for preventing static
electricity accidents are provided below. Take thorough safety measures based on this information.
 Typical Cause of Static Electricity Accidents

Static electricity accidents are generally caused by this sequence of events:
When liquid is passed through thin tubing at high flow rates, as in liquid
Generation of static electricity chromatograph, the electrostatic charges of the flowing matter generate
static electricity.
Generation of Static Electricity by a Liquid Flowing over a Solid
Flowing liquid A: Charges move with
flow of liquid.
B: Immobile charges,
fixed to surface of
solid.
Solid
Accumulation of static electricity If electrostatically charged liquid is allowed to accumulate in an electrically

insulated container, the charge will gradually increase, and can eventually
reach several thousand volts. If this happens and an electrical conductor
is brought within a certain distance of the container, electrical discharge
Release of energy through will occur, releasing thermal energy which will ignite any flammable gas of
electrical discharge sufficient density in the vicinity.
Potential accident situation Liquid flowing through thin
tubing at high rate.
 Air bubbles in liquid facilitate
Ignition of flammable substances generation of static electricity.
Insulated container of
polyethylene, etc.
spark
Flammable gas present in
Dry air container.
spark Flammable organic solvent with

large electrostatic charge.
Floor covered with rubber, etc.,

cannot conduct electricity away.
XIV SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Preventing Static Electricity Accidents

The best way to prevent static electricity accidents is simply to prevent the occurrence and accumulation of
electrostatic charges.
CAUTION
• It is important to take multiple preventive measures simultaneously.
• If large amounts of flammable solvents are collected in a large container, implement
preventative measures 1, 2, and 3 below.
Preventive Measure 1
Use a metal container for the waste liquid, and ground the container.
This will ensure that the electrical charges of the container and waste liquid pass to the ground.
Accessories for this measure

(1) Grounding wire with clip Part No. S228-21353-91
(2) 18 Liter metal container Part No. S038-00044
(3) 4 Liter metal container Part No. S038-00043-01
CAUTION
• Be sure to ground the metal waste container properly.
If the grounding wire is not properly attached or connected to the ground, static electricity can build up
in the container.
• Some metal waste containers have surfaces that are laminated or oxidized, and
therefore do not conduct electricity. After grounding the metal container, use a tester
to verify that electricity is conducted to the ground.
• If the liquid to be drained into the waste container is virtually non-conductive (10-10 S/m
or less), it will be necessary to add properly conductive, and therefore safe, liquid to the
tank.
This conductive liquid may be added beforehand.
Preventive Measures for Static

Connect clip to metal parts.
Connect to ground terminal or

other grounding point of the
Reduce the opening instrument to ground metal
with a cap. container.
18 Liter metal can

(preferably plated)
Liquid's static will be conducted

through container to ground.
SIL-20A/20AC XV
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
Cover the spaces between the tubing and the sides of the inlet and outlet openings of the waste container
with caps or other protective covering. This will prevent any sparks generated outside the container from
getting inside.
Accessories for this measure

Caps for 18 liter or 4 liter containers (with three 3 mm diameter openings)
Part No. S228-21354-91
Keep electrostatically charged objects, including the human body, away from the waste liquid container.
To prevent electrostatic charging of the human body, take the following precautions:
• Wear anti-static clothing and shoes.

• Ground the human body with anti-static wrist straps. (For safety, the wrist strap should be connected to
the ground using an intervening resistor of about 1 M.)
• Spread anti-static matting or the like on the floor, to make the floor conductive.
CAUTION
• Persons who have not taken anti-static precautions should touch some grounded
metal object before coming near the waste liquid container, in order to drain static
charges.
Use tubing with an inner diameter of at least 2 mm for drain lines with high flow rates.
CAUTION
• Periodically check the tubing connections for leaks.
Air bubbles in liquid can multiply the electrostatic charge by a factor of 20, 30 or more.
XVI SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
If it is not possible to use a conductive waste liquid container, take the following precautions:
• Ensure that the end of the inflow tubing is always submerged inside the container. Also, place some
type of grounded metal object, such as a ground wire connected to the instrument, into the liquid.
CAUTION
The above precaution will be ineffective for low conductivity (less than 10-10 S/m) liquids.
• Use as small a container as possible to minimize damage in the event of fire.
• Keep the room at a proper humidity.
Ambient humidity exceeding 65% will prevent static.
For Reference
Anti-static equipment (anti-static clothing, shoes and matting) and charge measurement equipment
(potentiometer) are sold by specialty manufacturers.
SIL-20A/20AC XVII
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment

In order to maintain the instrument's performance and obtain accurate measurement data, daily inspection
and periodic inspection/calibration are necessary.
For daily maintenance, inspection, and replacement parts, see the "Maintenance" section of this Instruction
Manual.
• Periodic inspection/calibration should be requested to your Shimadzu representative.
• Replacement cycles described for periodic replacement parts are rough estimate.
• Replacement may be required earlier than the described replacement cycles depending on usage
environment and frequency.
XVIII SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Precautions for Mobile Phase Selection and Use
CAUTION
• Do not use resin parts for the high-pressure tubing while pumping at high pressures.
Pumping at high pressure may cause resin tubing to be ruptured or disconnected, which could result in
mobile phase leaks. Please note the maximum withstand pressure of each part when resin parts are
used for the high-pressure tubing.
• Do not use the solvents listed below as the mobile phase when PEEK tubing is used
for plumbing. These solvents degrade the strength of the PEEK resin, which could
cause the tube to burst and the mobile phase to splash. Use stainless steal tubing.
Tetrahydrofuran (THF), chloroform, hexafluoroisopropanol (HFIP), concentrated sulfuric acid,
concentrated nitric acid, dichloroacetic acid, acetone *1), dichloromethane, dimethyl sulfoxide
(DMSO).
*1) Briefly using a weak solution of less than 0.5% acetone in water (e.g. in order to check gradient
performance) will present no problems.
Suppliers of the PEEK resin provide information about chemical resistance of PEEK which states that PEEK is
not affected by THF or chloroform. Such information, however, is presented as general guidelines, and it also
recommends testing of PEEK parts prior to use under specific conditions for the actual application.
The following are some data from test examples performed by Shimadzu regarding the chemical resistance of
PEEK components (tubing, high-pressure valve rotor, and needle seal) to several types of solvents. Although
apparently good results are shown in some combinations of solvent, tubing ID and pressure, this information
is merely for reference and should not be taken as guarantee on the chemical resistance of PEEK
components.
Optional 'Vespel needle seal' (Part No. S228-48258-91), or 'GPC Kit for SIL-20A/20AC' (Part No. S228-
46606-96), must be used to replace the part where rank B or C is indicated.
CAUTION
Hexafluoroisopropanol (HFIP) cannot be used in any case, since it weakens Vespel and
PEEK and may cause a tube to burst and splash the solvent.
Doing so will weaken the Vespel or PEEK components in the flow line, and this could result in splashing
the solvent.
[PEEK tubing]
The chemical resistance of PEEK tubing is ranked as A, B, or C for each combination of solvent and tube ID.
This ranking is based on the results of testing done by delivery the solvent through the PEEK tube at the
specified pressure for thirty days. Observation was made after the testing as to cracking, leaks, and changes
in mechanical strength.
(
A: There is no cracking, leak, or deformation.
B: There is no cracking or leak, but degrading in mechanical strength such as deformation is observed.
C: There is cracking or leak in the tubing.
SIL-20A/20AC XIX
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
Pressure
Solvent 0.13 mm ID 0.25 mm ID 0.5 mm ID Remark
(MPa)
20 C C C
100% THF
10 A B C
20 C C C Mixed with water.

50% THF
10 A B B Mixed with water.
20 A C C Mixed with water.

25% THF
10 A A C Mixed with water.
20 C C C
100% chloroform
10 B C C
20 C C C Mixed with acetonitrile.

50% chloroform
10 A A C Mixed with acetonitrile.
20 C C C Mixed with acetonitrile.

25% chloroform
10 A A A Mixed with acetonitrile.
20 A A A
100% acetonitrile
10 A A A
20 A A A Mixed with water.

50% acetonitrile

25% acetonitrile
20 A A A
Water
10 A A A
Note: Cover PEEK tubing with a protective sleeve when using a high pressure.
[High-pressure valve rotor]

The chemical resistance of the rotor is ranked as A, B, or C according to rotor replacement intervals
determined by test results of continuous valve switching with the solvent delivered at 20 MPa and 5 MPa.
Note that the replacement intervals shown here are not guaranteed since the rotor life may vary due to other
conditions.
(
A: Rotor should be replaced every 100,000 switching cycles.
B: Rotor should be replaced every 50,000 switching cycles.
C: Rotor should be replaced in less than 20,000 switching cycles.
Pressure PEEK rotor

Solvent Remark
(MPa) (for standard high pressure valve)
20 A
100% THF
5 A
20 A Mixed with water.

50% THF
XX SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Pressure PEEK rotor

Solvent Remark
(MPa) (for standard high pressure valve)

25% THF
20 A
100% chloroform
5 A
20 A Mixed with acetonitrile.

50% chloroform

25% chloroform
20 A
100% acetonitrile
5 A

50% acetonitrile

25% acetonitrile
20 A
Water
5 A
20 A
Methanol
5 A
[Needle seal]
The chemical resistance of needle seals is ranked as A, B, or C according to seal replacement intervals
determined by test results of continuous injections with the solvent delivered at 20 MPa and 10 MPa. Note
that the replacement intervals shown here are not guaranteed since the needle seal life may vary due to other
conditions.
(
A: Needle seal should be replaced every 40,000 injections.
B: Needle seal should be replaced every 20,000 injections.
C: Needle seal should be replaced in less than 20,000 injections.
Pressure
Solvent PEEK Needle Seal Vespel Needle Seal Remark
(MPa)
20 C A
100% THF
10 C A
20 A A Mixed with water.

50% THF

25% THF
100% chloroform 20 C A
SIL-20A/20AC XXI
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
Pressure
Solvent PEEK Needle Seal Vespel Needle Seal Remark
(MPa)
20 A A Mixed with acetonitrile.

50% chloroform

25% chloroform
20 A A
100% acetonitrile
10 A A

50% acetonitrile

25% acetonitrile
20 A A
Water
10 A A
NOTE
• Use only HPLC grade or comparable mobile phase, and filter it with a filter of 0.45 µm mesh or finer
before use to remove particulates and foreign matter.
• Halogen ions can corrode the stainless steel material (SUS316L) used in the plumbing, so if such
materials are used for the wetted parts of the equipment, avoid, as much as possible mobile phases
that contain halogen ions - such as KCl, NaCl and NH4Cl or mobile phases that generate halogen ions
in certain reactions. If such mobile phases must be used, clean all flow lines thoroughly with distilled
water immediately after analysis.
• When SPD or a similar UV detector is used for high-sensitivity analysis, be sure to use HPLC grade
mobile phases that have a low absorptivity of UV rays.
• Always degas the mobile phase, as air bubbles may tend to form during solvent mixing or during
temperature or pressure changes. Air bubbles may cause pump malfunctions and detector signal
noise.
• Understand the properties, including boiling points, firing point and viscosities, of the mobile phase.
"9.7 Mobile Phase Characteristics" P. 9-41.
XXII SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Warning Labels
Warning Labels
For safety operation, warning labels are affixed to where special attention is required.
Should any of these labels peel off or be damaged, obtain replacements from Shimadzu Corporation.
Warning label
(Part No. S228-42603)
Caution, Warning label

(Part No. S228-38924-02)
SIL-20A/20AC XXIII
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Introduction
XXIV SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................................................I
Warranty and After-Sales Service .................................................................................III
Safety Instructions ......................................................................................................... V
 Application Precautions ................................................................................................ V
 Installation Site Precautions......................................................................................... VI
 Installation Precautions............................................................................................... VII
 Operation Precautions .................................................................................................. X
 Precautions for Instrument Inspection, Maintenance, Adjustment and Care .............. XII
 In an Emergency........................................................................................................ XIII
 During a Power Outage ............................................................................................. XIII
Static Electricity Precautions ...................................................................................... XIV
 Typical Cause of Static Electricity Accidents .............................................................XIV
 Preventing Static Electricity Accidents........................................................................XV
Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment .............................................................. XVIII
Precautions for Mobile Phase Selection and Use ...................................................... XIX
Warning Labels ......................................................................................................... XXIII
Chapter 1 Configuration
1.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Sample Injection Modes ...................................................................................1-2

1.2.1 Standard Injection Mode ................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.2 Bracket Sequence Analysis Mode .................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Sample Injection ...............................................................................................1-3

1.4 Component Parts .............................................................................................1-8
1.5 Optional Parts .................................................................................................1-11

 Optional Sample Loop ............................................................................................ 1-11
 Rinsing Pump .......................................................................................................... 1-11
 Maintenance Kit ...................................................................................................... 1-12
 Vespel Needle Seal (For SIL-20AHT/20ACHT) ...................................................... 1-12
 Small-Capacity PEEK Needle Seal ......................................................................... 1-13
 Tubing for Column Connection ............................................................................... 1-14
 SUS Housing Valve Kit (For SIL-20A/20AC) .......................................................... 1-14
 GPC Kit (For SIL-20A/20AC) .................................................................................. 1-14
 Inert Kit (For SIL-20A/20AC) ................................................................................... 1-14
 SIL-20A/CXR Modification Kit (SIL-20A/20AC/20AHT/20ACHT) ............................ 1-15
 Sample Racks ......................................................................................................... 1-15
 Vials ........................................................................................................................ 1-18
 Microtiter Plates ...................................................................................................... 1-20
SIL-20A/20AC Contents-1
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
 Rack Changers II .....................................................................................................1-22

 1.5-mL Vial Plate Kit for Rack Changer II ................................................................1-22
Chapter 2 Parts Identification and Function

2.1 Front Section Interior ........................................................................................2-2
2.2 Back .................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Names and Functions of Display Panel and Keypad .......................................2-5

2.3.1 Display Panel .................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2 Keypad ............................................................................................................ 2-6
Chapter 3 Preparation
3.1 Turning Power ON/OFF ...................................................................................3-2
3.2 Rinse Solution and Waste Containers Preparation ..........................................3-3
3.3 Rinse Solution Selection ..................................................................................3-4

3.4 Purging Air Bubbles .........................................................................................3-6
3.5 Preparing Samples ...........................................................................................3-7
Chapter 4 Basic Operation

4.1 Preparing the Samples .....................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Setting Samples in the Sample Rack .............................................................. 4-2
4.1.2 Setting Samples in Microtiter Plates ............................................................... 4-4
 About the MTP Rack .................................................................................................4-4
4.1.3 Setting Samples Using a Sample Cooler (Only C Models) ............................. 4-5
 Set the Vial ................................................................................................................4-5
4.2 Creating an Analysis Sequence Table .............................................................4-7

 Deleting a Line ........................................................................................................4-10
 Inserting a Line ........................................................................................................4-10
4.3 Starting Injection ............................................................................................4-11
4.4 Stopping Injection ...........................................................................................4-12

 To Pause the Injection Process Temporarily ...........................................................4-12
 To Immediately Stop the Injection Process .............................................................4-12
 Skipping Injection for Specific Vials .........................................................................4-13
4.5 Finishing Injection ..........................................................................................4-13
Contents-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
4.6 Rinsing ...........................................................................................................4-14

4.6.1 Rinsing the Mobile Phase Flow Lines ........................................................... 4-14
4.6.2 Rinsing the Sample Flow Lines ..................................................................... 4-15
4.6.3 Cleaning the High-pressure Valve ................................................................ 4-15
4.6.4 Cleaning Rinsing Port and Rinsing Port Cover ............................................. 4-16
Chapter 5 Application Operation

5.1 Display Screens ...............................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 Types of Screens ............................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.2 Auxiliary Settings Screens .............................................................................. 5-3
5.1.3 VP Function Screens .................................................................................... 5-10
5.2 Parameter in Auxiliary Functions ....................................................................5-16

5.2.1 List of Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................. 5-16
 Parameter Settings Group ...................................................................................... 5-16
 Control Settings Group ........................................................................................... 5-17
 System Settings Group ........................................................................................... 5-17
 Changer Settings Group ......................................................................................... 5-18
5.2.2 Showing the Auxiliary Function Screens ....................................................... 5-18
5.2.3 Parameter Settings Group ............................................................................ 5-19
 [COOLER TEMP] .................................................................................................... 5-19
 [PURGE TIME] ........................................................................................................ 5-19
 [RINSE MODE] ....................................................................................................... 5-20
 [RINSE DIPTIME] ................................................................................................... 5-20
 [RINSE VOLUME] ................................................................................................... 5-21
 [RINSE SPEED] ...................................................................................................... 5-21
 [SAMPLE SPEED] .................................................................................................. 5-22
 [NEEDLE STROKE] ................................................................................................ 5-22
 [MTP WELL] ............................................................................................................ 5-26
 [MTP ORDER] ........................................................................................................ 5-27
 [EVENT] .................................................................................................................. 5-29
 [Repeat Inj Table] .................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.4 Control Settings Group .................................................................................. 5-30
 [Clear SMPTBL] ...................................................................................................... 5-30
 [Clear RepInjtbl] ...................................................................................................... 5-30
 [STAT] ..................................................................................................................... 5-31
 [PAUSE] .................................................................................................................. 5-32
 [MANUAL PURGE] ................................................................................................. 5-32
 [Z HOME] ................................................................................................................ 5-33
 [TEST INJ PORT] ................................................................................................... 5-33
 [PURGE (Ext Pump)] .............................................................................................. 5-33
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
 [HPV TEST] .............................................................................................................5-34

5.2.5 System Settings Group ................................................................................. 5-34
 [LOCAL] ...................................................................................................................5-34
 [KEY CLOSE] ..........................................................................................................5-34
 [BRIGHTNESS] .......................................................................................................5-35
 [CNT RACK STRK] ..................................................................................................5-35
 [MAX Inj. Volume] ....................................................................................................5-35
 [SELECT EVENT1] ..................................................................................................5-36
 [SELECT EVENT2] ..................................................................................................5-36
 [SELECT EVENT3] ..................................................................................................5-36
 [RINSE METHOD] ...................................................................................................5-37
 [EXT RINSE TIME] ..................................................................................................5-38
 [SMALL ID VIAL] .....................................................................................................5-38
 [CBM LINK] .............................................................................................................5-38
 [BEEP MODE] .........................................................................................................5-39
 [CUT OFF LOOP] ....................................................................................................5-39
 [C TIME] ..................................................................................................................5-40
5.2.6 Changer Settings Group ............................................................................... 5-43
 [DISP RACK STATUS] ............................................................................................5-43
 [STACK A CODE] ....................................................................................................5-43
 [STACK B CODE] ....................................................................................................5-44
 [STACK C CODE] ....................................................................................................5-44
 [STACK D CODE] ....................................................................................................5-44
 [STACK A STRK] .....................................................................................................5-45
 [STACK B STRK] .....................................................................................................5-45
 [STACK C STRK] ....................................................................................................5-46
 [STACK D STRK] ....................................................................................................5-46
 [REMOVE RACK] ....................................................................................................5-47
 [AUTO EXCHANGE] ...............................................................................................5-47
 [REMOVE DUMMY] ................................................................................................5-48
 [RC STACK SCAN] .................................................................................................5-49
 [Clear RACK INFO] .................................................................................................5-50
 [RC INITIALIZE] .......................................................................................................5-50
 [LED LIGHT] ............................................................................................................5-50
5.3 Using a Rack Changer II ................................................................................5-51
5.4 Setting Bracket Sequence Analysis ...............................................................5-52

5.4.1 Creating a Repeat Injection Table ................................................................. 5-53
 Displaying the Setting Screen .................................................................................5-53
 Setting Repeat Injection Table ................................................................................5-53
 Setting Interval Conditions .......................................................................................5-55
 Setting Sample Table ..............................................................................................5-55
5.4.2 Creating an Analysis Sequence Table during the Analysis ........................... 5-57
5.4.3 Analysis in Bracket Sequence Analysis Mode .............................................. 5-57
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
5.5 VP Functions ..................................................................................................5-58

5.5.1 List of VP Functions ...................................................................................... 5-58
 Product Information Group ...................................................................................... 5-58
 Maintenance Information Group ............................................................................. 5-58
 Validation Support Group ........................................................................................ 5-59
 Calibration Support Group ...................................................................................... 5-59
 CBM Parameter Group ........................................................................................... 5-60
5.5.2 Displaying the VP Functions ......................................................................... 5-61
5.5.3 Product Information Group ............................................................................ 5-62
 [SERIAL NUMBER] ................................................................................................. 5-62
 [S/W ID] ................................................................................................................... 5-62
 [RC SERIAL NUMBER] .......................................................................................... 5-62
 [RC S/W ID] ............................................................................................................ 5-62
5.5.4 Maintenance Information Group .................................................................... 5-63
 [TOTAL OP TIME] ................................................................................................... 5-63
 [NDL SEAL USED] .................................................................................................. 5-63
 [HPV SEAL USED] ................................................................................................. 5-63
 [LPV SEAL USED] .................................................................................................. 5-64
 [EXT PUMP USED] ................................................................................................. 5-64
 [NDLE FLUSH] ........................................................................................................ 5-64
 [P-SET] ................................................................................................................... 5-64
 [HPV ROTATION] ................................................................................................... 5-65
 [LPV ROTATION] .................................................................................................... 5-65
 [PART REPLACEMENT] ........................................................................................ 5-65
 [MAINTENANCE LOG] ........................................................................................... 5-66
 [OPERATION LOG] ................................................................................................ 5-66
 [ERROR LOG] ........................................................................................................ 5-67
5.5.5 Validation Support Group .............................................................................. 5-68
 [DATE] .................................................................................................................... 5-68
 [TIME] ..................................................................................................................... 5-68
 [MEMORY CHECK] ................................................................................................ 5-69
 [POSITION SENS] .................................................................................................. 5-69
 [LEAK SENSOR TEST] .......................................................................................... 5-70
5.5.6 Calibration Support Group ............................................................................ 5-71
 [Input PASSWORD] ................................................................................................ 5-71
 [ADJUST MTP] ....................................................................................................... 5-71
 [ERASE MTP ADJ] ................................................................................................. 5-76
 [ASP FACTOR] ....................................................................................................... 5-77
 [LEAK THR] ............................................................................................................ 5-79
 [NDL SEAL] ............................................................................................................. 5-79
 [HPV SEAL] ............................................................................................................ 5-79
 [LPV SEAL] ............................................................................................................. 5-79
 [EXT PUMP] ............................................................................................................ 5-80
 [CANCEL DOORSW] .............................................................................................. 5-80
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
 [CANCEL RACKDET] ..............................................................................................5-81

 [CANCEL VIALDET] ................................................................................................5-82
 [OP MODE] .............................................................................................................5-82
 [INITIALIZE PARAM] ...............................................................................................5-82
 [PARAMETER LOCK] .............................................................................................5-83
 [CHANGE PASSWORD] .........................................................................................5-84
 [ADJUST RACK] ......................................................................................................5-85
 [ADJUST INJ PORT] ...............................................................................................5-86
 [ERASE RACK.P ADJ] ............................................................................................5-89
 [ERASE INJ.P ADJ] .................................................................................................5-89
 [TEMP DELTA] ........................................................................................................5-89
5.5.7 CBM Parameter Group ................................................................................. 5-90
 Displaying the Serial Number [SERIAL NUMBER] ..................................................5-90
 Displaying the S/W Version Number [S/W ID] .........................................................5-90
 Setting Communication Medium for Data Processing Unit [INTERFACE] ..............5-90
 Setting Transmitting Speed of Ethernet [ETHERNET SPEED] ...............................5-91
 Setting Used/Not used of Default Gateway [USE GATEWAY] ................................5-91
 Setting the IP Address [IP ADDRESS] ....................................................................5-91
 Setting the Subnet Mask [SUBNET MASK] .............................................................5-92
 Setting the Default Gateway [DEFAULT GATEWAY] .............................................5-92
 Setting the Serial Communication [TRS MODE] .....................................................5-93
5.6 Control by CBM-20A or CBM-20Alite System Controller ...............................5-94

5.6.1 Preparation .................................................................................................... 5-94
5.6.2 Basic Parameters .......................................................................................... 5-94
5.7 Control by SCL-10Avp System Controller ......................................................5-95

5.7.1 Preparation .................................................................................................... 5-95
5.7.2 Required Firmware and Hardware ................................................................ 5-95
5.7.3 Attention ........................................................................................................ 5-95
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting and Corrective Action ............................................................6-2
 In Case of Leaking ....................................................................................................6-5
6.2 Countermeasures against Clogging (Pressure Increase) in Flow Lines ..........6-6

6.2.1 Causes and Countermeasures against Clogging ............................................ 6-8
6.3 Error Messages ..............................................................................................6-10
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
Chapter 7 Hardware Validation

7.1 Overview of Hardware Validation .....................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Hardware Validation ........................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.2 Types of Hardware Validation ......................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Implementation of Hardware Validation ...........................................................7-3

7.2.1 Periodic Validation .......................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Daily Inspection ............................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Validation After Maintenance .......................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Validation Precautions ......................................................................................7-4

7.3.1 Environment .................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.2 Installation Site ................................................................................................ 7-4
7.4 Equipment Required for Validation ...................................................................7-5

 Testing Equipment .................................................................................................... 7-5
 Standard Reagents for Validation ............................................................................. 7-6
 Hardware Testing Supplies ....................................................................................... 7-6
7.5 Validation: Autosampler ...................................................................................7-7

7.5.1 Check Terms ................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5.2 ROM, RAM Self Diagnosis .............................................................................. 7-7
 Objective ................................................................................................................... 7-7
 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5.3 Firmware Version Check ................................................................................. 7-8
 Objective ................................................................................................................... 7-8
 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................... 7-8
7.5.4 Display, LED Test ........................................................................................... 7-8
 Objective ................................................................................................................... 7-8
 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................... 7-8
7.5.5 Movement and Position Sensor Check ........................................................... 7-9
 Objective ................................................................................................................... 7-9
 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.6 Injection Volume Accuracy Test ...................................................................... 7-9
 Objective ................................................................................................................... 7-9
 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.7 Leak Sensor Test .......................................................................................... 7-11
 Objective ................................................................................................................. 7-11
 Check Procedure .................................................................................................... 7-11
7.5.8 Temperature Accuracy Test .......................................................................... 7-12
 Objective ................................................................................................................. 7-12
 Check Procedure .................................................................................................... 7-12
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
7.6 System Validation ..........................................................................................7-14

7.6.1 Validation of Isocratic LC System ................................................................. 7-14
 Objective .................................................................................................................7-14
 Items Required for Validation ..................................................................................7-14
 Checking and Preparing the LC System .................................................................7-15
 Validation Procedure ...............................................................................................7-16
 Parameter Settings for Isocratic System Validation ................................................7-17
7.6.2 Validation of Gradient LC System ................................................................. 7-18
 Objective .................................................................................................................7-18
 Items Required for Validation ..................................................................................7-18
 Checking and Preparing the LC System .................................................................7-18
 Validation Procedure ...............................................................................................7-20
 Parameter Settings for Gradient System Validation ................................................7-21
7.7 If Validation Fails ............................................................................................7-22

 Check the Service Life of Consumables ..................................................................7-22
 Check the Flow Lines ..............................................................................................7-22
 Check Other Components .......................................................................................7-22
 Perform Troubleshooting .........................................................................................7-22
 If a Cause cannot Be Determined, Contact your Shimadzu Representative ...........7-22
Chapter 8 Maintenance
8.1 Periodic Inspection and Maintenance ..............................................................8-2
8.1.1 Prior to Inspection and Maintenance ............................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 List of Periodic Inspection and Maintenance ................................................... 8-2
8.2 Replacing Needle Seal .....................................................................................8-5

8.2.1 Removing the Needle Seal ............................................................................. 8-6
8.2.2 Attaching the Needle Seal ............................................................................... 8-7
8.3 Replacing Plunger Seal ....................................................................................8-8

8.3.1 Before Removing Pump Head ........................................................................ 8-8
8.3.2 Removing the Pump Head .............................................................................. 8-8
8.3.3 Replacing the Plunger Seal ............................................................................. 8-9
8.3.4 Installing the Pump Head .............................................................................. 8-11
8.3.5 Check after Replacement .............................................................................. 8-12
8.4 Replacing and Inspecting Measuring Pump Plunger .....................................8-13

8.4.1 Before Removing the Measuring Pump Plunger ........................................... 8-13
8.4.2 Replacing the Measuring Pump Plunger ....................................................... 8-13
8.4.3 Installing the Measuring Pump Plunger ........................................................ 8-15
8.4.4 Check after Replacement .............................................................................. 8-16
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
8.5 Replacing and Inspecting Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ..................8-17
8.5.1 Removing the Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ................................... 8-17
8.5.2 Installing the Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ..................................... 8-19
8.5.3 Resetting the Usage Frequency .................................................................... 8-20
8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY .......8-21
8.6.1 Before Removing the High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY ............ 8-21
8.6.2 Removing the High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY ........................ 8-22
8.6.3 Installing the High-Pressure Valve Rotor and the Stator ASSY .................... 8-24
8.6.4 Resetting the Usage Frequency .................................................................... 8-26
8.7 Replacing Sample Loop .................................................................................8-28

8.7.1 Before Removing the Sample Loop .............................................................. 8-28
8.7.2 Removing the Sample Loop .......................................................................... 8-29
8.7.3 Installing the Sample Loop ............................................................................ 8-31
8.8 Inspecting (Replacing) and Ultrasonic Bath Cleaning of Suction Filter ..........8-33
8.8.1 Removing the Suction Filter .......................................................................... 8-33
8.8.2 Installing the Suction Filter ............................................................................ 8-34
8.9 Replacing Needle ...........................................................................................8-35

8.9.1 Before Replacing the Needle ........................................................................ 8-35
8.9.2 Removing the Needle .................................................................................... 8-35
8.9.3 Installing the Needle ...................................................................................... 8-36
8.10 Replacing Fuse ..............................................................................................8-37
8.11 Replacing Panel F ..........................................................................................8-39
8.12 Replacing Rinsing Port Cap ...........................................................................8-40

8.12.1 Before Replacing the Rinsing Port Cap ........................................................ 8-40
8.12.2 Replacing the Rinsing Port Cap .................................................................... 8-40
8.13 Rinsing Flow Lines .........................................................................................8-42

8.13.1 Rinsing Needle and Sample Loop ................................................................. 8-42
8.13.2 Reverse Rinsing of the Flow Lines ................................................................ 8-43
8.14 Replacing Outlet Tubing .................................................................................8-44

8.14.1 Before Removing the Outlet Tubing .............................................................. 8-44
8.14.2 Replacing the Outlet Tubing .......................................................................... 8-45
8.15 Exterior Cleaning ............................................................................................8-48
8.16 Maintenance for Long Periods without Use ....................................................8-49

8.16.1 Moving the Needle ........................................................................................ 8-49
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
8.17 Maintenance for Continuous Use over Extended Periods .............................8-50
Chapter 9 Technical Information

9.1 Installation ........................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 Installation Site ................................................................................................ 9-2
 Suitable Sites and Preparation ..................................................................................9-2
 Required Installation Space .......................................................................................9-3
9.1.2 Installation ....................................................................................................... 9-4
 Removing the Shipping Bracket ................................................................................9-4
 Installation .................................................................................................................9-7
 Stacking Brackets ......................................................................................................9-7
9.1.3 Power Supply Connection ............................................................................... 9-8
 Connecting to the Power Outlet ...............................................................................9-10
 Grounding ................................................................................................................9-10
9.1.4 Prior to Plumbing ........................................................................................... 9-11
 Types of Tubings and Connectors ...........................................................................9-11
 Cutting the Tubings .................................................................................................9-11
 Connecting the Tubings ..........................................................................................9-13
 Male Nut Fitting (SIL-20AHT/20ACHT) ...................................................................9-14
 Protective Plugs ......................................................................................................9-15
9.1.5 Plumbing ....................................................................................................... 9-16
 Rinse Solution and Waste Container Preparation ...................................................9-16
 Plumbing the Inlet/Outlet Tubing .............................................................................9-17
 Plumbing between Outlet Tubing and Column ........................................................9-18
 Plumbing the Rinse Solution Drain Tubing (standard accessory) ...........................9-19
9.1.6 Tubing Example for High-Pressure Gradient System ................................... 9-21
9.1.7 Wiring ............................................................................................................ 9-22
 Connecting the Optical Cable ..................................................................................9-22
 Connection to System Controller .............................................................................9-23
9.1.8 Installation of Optional Equipment ................................................................ 9-23
 Sample Rack and Vials ...........................................................................................9-23
9.1.9 Transporting the Instrument .......................................................................... 9-23
9.1.10 Installation of Ambient Temperature Sensor (Only C Models) ...................... 9-25
9.2 Connection to External Input/Output Terminals .............................................9-26

9.2.1 Event Cable ................................................................................................... 9-26
9.2.2 Connection of Event Cable ........................................................................... 9-27
9.3 Plumbing of the Autosampler .........................................................................9-28

9.3.1 Notes on the Inner Diameter of tubing ......................................................... 9-28
 Effects of Tubing on Chromatographic Resolution ..................................................9-28
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
 Guideline to Select Tubing ...................................................................................... 9-28

9.3.2 General Guidelines for Changing the Plumbing ............................................ 9-29
 When a Manual Injector Is Connected Downstream from this Instrument .............. 9-29
 When only Columns of Wide Bore (6 mm ID or More) Are Used ............................ 9-29
 When Analysis Through-put has Priority over Protection of Columns
from Clogging (i.e. Sample Filtration) ..................................................................... 9-29
9.4 Specifications .................................................................................................9-30

9.4.1 Sample Injection ............................................................................................ 9-30
9.4.2 Sample Cooler (Only C Models) ................................................................... 9-31
9.4.3 Others ........................................................................................................... 9-31
9.5 Maintenance Parts .........................................................................................9-34

9.5.1 Consumable Parts ......................................................................................... 9-34
9.5.2 Replacement Parts ........................................................................................ 9-34
 Fuse ........................................................................................................................ 9-34
 Autosampler Base Parts ......................................................................................... 9-35
 Valve ASSY ............................................................................................................ 9-35
 Tubing Parts ............................................................................................................ 9-35
 Service Tools .......................................................................................................... 9-36
 Others ..................................................................................................................... 9-37
9.5.3 Maintenance Kit ............................................................................................ 9-37
 Maintenance Kit SIL-20A/20AC (Part No. S228-45413-95) .................................... 9-37
 Maintenance Kit SIL-20AHT/20ACHT (Part No. S228-45413-96) .......................... 9-38
 Maintenance Kit for SIL-20A/20AC/20AHT/20ACHT (Part No.: S228-45413-97) ... 9-39
9.6 Introduction to HPLC System .........................................................................9-40
9.7 Mobile Phase Characteristics .........................................................................9-41
Index
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Contents
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1 Configuration
1
Contents
1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Sample Injection Modes................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Sample Injection............................................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Component Parts ............................................................................................. 1-8
1.5 Optional Parts ................................................................................................ 1-11
1. Configuration
1.1 Overview
This instrument is an autosampler that is designed for use with Prominence series High Performance Liquid
Chromatograph. The applicable pressure is 20 MPa at maximum with SIL-20A/20AC, 35 MPa with SIL-
20AHT/20ACHT. The injection capacity ranges from 0.1 µL up to a maximum of 2,000 µL (with optional
accessories installed).
There are two modes for sample injection; standard injection mode that facilitates condition setting, and
bracket sequence analysis mode that the bracket sequence analysis can be performed in a certain cycle. A C
model instrument is equipped with a sample cooler that is able to control the sample temperature in the range
between 4 and 40 °C. With this feature, a sample that decomposes at the room temperature can be cooled
and analyzed continually.
1.2 Sample Injection Modes

This autosampler has two sample injection modes, standard injection mode and bracket sequence analysis
mode.
1.2.1 Standard Injection Mode

This is the simplest mode for making a standard injection. In this mode, specify the vial number, number of
injections, injection volume and analysis time in the sample table setting screen (details are in Section
"4.2 Creating an Analysis Sequence Table" P. 4-7). Also, set the needle stroke, the rinse volume, the
rinsing speed, sampling speed, etc. in the Parameter setting screen.
1.2.2 Bracket Sequence Analysis Mode

This mode can be used to inject a predetermined number of samples repeatedly, at periodic intervals. In this
mode, a special repeat injection table is prepared (in addition to the default analysis sequence table).
Preparing this repeat injection table allows bracket sequence analysis to be performed at a certain cycle while
sampling table for standard injection is being executed.
1-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1.3 Sample Injection

1
The sequence of operations involved when injecting samples is as shown in the flow and operation diagrams
below. Use these diagrams to become familiar with the operation of the instrument.
Rinsing
port
Measuring pump
Sample loop
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4
Manual syringe 1 Solvent delivery
2 module
Rinse solution
3 6
4 5
Needle
Injection port Column
High-pressure valve
(Inject)
Fig. 1.1
1. Standby (READY)
Mobile phase from the reservoir is pumped, in order, through the high-pressure valve, sample loop, needle,
injection port and back through high-pressure valve, before reaching the analysis column.
Rinsing
port
Measuring pump
Sample loop
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4
2 module
Rinse solution
3 6
4 5
Needle
High-pressure valve
(Inject)
Fig. 1.2
SIL-20A/20AC 1-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
2. Release of pressure in flow line

The high-pressure valve rotates to the load position (60 in the clockwise), and the high-pressure sample-loop
mobile phase remaining in the sample loop flows, in order, through the needle, sample loop, high-pressure
valve, measuring pump, low-pressure valve, and rinsing port, relieving the pressure in the sample loop.
Rinsing port
Measuring pump
Sample loop
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4
Manual syringe 60
2 1 Solvent delivery
module
Rinse solution
3 6
Needle 4 5
High-pressure valve
(Load)
Fig. 1.3
3. Rinsing of needle before sample aspiration

The low-pressure valve rotates to measuring position (30° in clockwise), and the needle is inserted into the
rinsing port, where its outer surfaces are rinsed with the rinse solution inside the port.
It is also possible to set the autosampler not to perform rinsing. In addition, using a needle-rinsing pump
(optional) allows rinsing to be performed with two types of rinse solutions.
Sample loop
Needle
Measuring pump
Rinsing
port
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4 Solvent delivery
Manual syringe 2 1 module
Rinse solution 3 6
4 5
High-pressure valve Column

(Load)
Fig. 1.4
1-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4. Sample aspiration
The needle is inserted into the vial. Then the measuring pump draws the sample into the needle and sample
loop.
1
Sample loop
Measuring pump
Rinsing
port
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4 2 1
Solvent delivery
Manual syringe module
Rinse solution 3 6
Vial
4 5

(Load)
Fig. 1.5
5. Rinsing of needle after sample aspiration

The needle is inserted into the rinsing port, where its outer surfaces are rinsed with the rinse solution inside the port.
It is also possible to set the autosampler not to perform rinsing. In addition, using a needle-rinsing pump
(optional) allows rinsing to be performed with two types of rinse solutions.
Sample loop
Needle
Measuring pump
Rinsing
port
1
2
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4
Manual syringe 2 1 Solvent delivery
module
Rinse solution 3 6
4 5

(Load)
Fig. 1.6
SIL-20A/20AC 1-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
6. Start of analysis
The needle is inserted into the injection port, and the high-pressure valve rotates 60° counterclockwise to the
injection position. The sample is injected into the flow lines and, along with the mobile phase, passes through
the high-pressure valve and into the column, where analysis begins.
Rinsing
port
Measuring pump
Sample loop
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4
module
Rinse solution
3 6
4 5

(Inject)
Fig. 1.7
7. Purge of measurement flow line (rinse solution aspiration)

The low-pressure valve rotates 30° counterclockwise. (Port 1 and 2 are connective.) And after the plunger of
the measuring pump has returned to the home position, the low-pressure valve rotates 60° clockwise. (Port 4
and 5 are connective.) and the plunger operates to aspirate rinse solution.
Rinsing
port
Measuring pump Sample loop
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4
Manual syringe Solvent delivery
2 1
module
Rinse solution
3 6
4 5

(Inject)
Fig. 1.8
1-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Purge of measurement flow line (rinse solution discharge)

The low-pressure valve rotates 60 counterclockwise. (Port 1 and 2 are connective.)
And measuring pump plunger operates to discharge rinse solution to rinsing port.
1
Rinsing
port
Measuring pump Sample loop
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4
module
Rinse solution
3 6
4 5
Column
High-pressure valve
(Inject)
Fig. 1.9
SIL-20A/20AC 1-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
1.4 Component Parts

This instrument consists of the standard parts listed below. Check the parts against this list after unpacking.
The standard parts provided depend on the power supply voltage. (See below.) After unpacking, verify that
the correct types and quantity of parts have been provided.
The 2-digit numbers in the remark column in the table below indicate the power supply voltages for the part.
-32, -42 is a 120 V power supply, and -36, -38, -46, -48, -58 is a 220-240 V power supply.
These 2-digit figures refer to the last two digits in the product number of the instrument (S228-45006/45007
and S228-45119/45120).
[SIL-20A/20AC]
Q'ty
No. Part Part No. SIL-20A SIL-20AC Remark
(S228-45006-) (S228-45007-)
Important Information - Please Read 1)

1 S228-92018 1 1
(Information booklet)
2 Instruction manual (CD-ROM) S228-92016-41 1 1

2)
S228-39988-93 -32, -36, -38

3 Parts pack 1 1 -42, -46, -48,
S228-39988-43
-58
4 Optical cable S070-92025-51 1 1
5 Vial 1.5 mL (containing 10 pcs.) S228-38446-91 1 1
6 1.5-mL vial cooling rack S228-50761-92 1
7 Standard rack for 1.5 mL vial S228-45409-92 1
8 Control vial rack S228-44634-91 1 1
9 PTFE tubing (7 mm OD) S016-37507 800 mm 800 mm
11 Silicone tubing S228-25162-03 1 1
Part No. for

replacement
12 Suction filter ASSY 228-45708-93 1 1
:S228-45708-
91
13 Drain tubing ASSY (ETFE) S228-44608-91 1 1
14 Cover for rinsing port S228-48328 1 1
15 Rinsing port cap (without holes) 228-47973-01 2 2
16 Rinsing port cap (with holes) 228-47973-02 2 2
17 AC power cord (for UL/CSA) S071-60821-08 1 1 -32, -42
18 AC power cord (for VDE) S071-60825-51 1 1 -38, -48, -58
19 AC Power cord (for China) S465-06046 1 1 -36, -46
20 Jig rack teaching S228-50895-91 1 1
1-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1.4 Component Parts
Q'ty
No. Part Part No. SIL-20A
(S228-45006-)
SIL-20AC
(S228-45007-)
Remark 1
21 Drain tubing adapter S228-43347 1 1
22 Event cable S228-28253-91 1 1
23 Lock catch S072-60314-03 1 1
24 L-type drain tubing S228-43271-92 1
26 PEEK tubing 0.13 ID × 1MT S228-40984-95 1 1
27 Clamp, DKN-10GSP S072-60319-01 1
28 Connector S228-50602 1 1
29 Bushing 3, PEEK S228-39084 2 2
30 Ferrule 3.0F-T S228-12493 2 2
31 FEP Tubing (3 × 1.5) S670-10321-05 2m 2m
32 Male nut, PEEK S228-18565 2 2
33 Fitting set 20A S228-45407-91 1 1
∗1) Contains cautions for use regarding the instrument.

∗2) A paper based manual (S228-90475) is available at a fee.
[SIL-20AHT/20ACHT]
Q'ty
No. Part Part No. SIL-20AHT SIL-20ACHT Remark
(S228-45119-) (S228-45120-)
Important Information - Please Read ∗

1 S228-92018 1 1 1)
(Information booklet)
∗2)
2 Instruction manual (CD-ROM) S228-92016-41 1 1
S228-39988-93 -32, -36, -38

3 Parts pack 1 1 -42, -46, -48,
S228-39988-43
-58
4 Optical cable S070-92025-51 1 1
5 Vial 1.5 mL (containing 10 pcs.) S228-38446-91 1 1
6 1.5-mL vial cooling rack S228-50761-92 1
7 1.5-mL vial standard rack S228-45409-92 1
8 Control vial rack S228-44634-91 1 1
11 Silicone tubing S228-25162-03 1 1
12 Suction filter ASSY 228-45708-93 1 1
13 Drain tubing ASSY (ETFE) S228-44608-91 1 1
SIL-20A/20AC 1-9
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
Q'ty
No. Part Part No. SIL-20AHT SIL-20ACHT Remark
(S228-45119-) (S228-45120-)
14 Cover for rinsing port S228-48328 1 1
15 Rinsing port cap (without holes) 228-47973-01 2 2
16 Rinsing port cap (with holes) 228-47973-02 2 2
17 AC power cord (for UL/CSA) S071-60821-08 1 1 -32, -42
18 AC power cord (for VDE) S071-60825-51 1 1 -38, -48, -58
19 AC Power cord (for China) S465-06046 1 1 -36, -46
20 Jig rack teaching S228-50895-91 1 1
21 Drain tubing adapter S228-43347 1 1
22 Event cable S228-28253-91 1 1
23 Lock catch S072-60314-03 1 1
ID identification
26 SUS tubing, ID 0.17 × 1000 mm S228-46609-94 1 1 ∗
mark (white) 3)
27 Clamp, DKN-10GSP S072-60319-01 1
28 Connector S228-50602 1 1
29 Bushing 3, PEEK S228-39084 2 2
30 Ferrule 3.0F-T S228-12493 2 2
31 FEP Tubing (3 × 1.5) S670-10321-05 2m 2m
32 Male nut, 1.6MN S228-16001 1 1
33 Ferrule S228-16000-10 1 1
34 Male nut fitting S228-48485-91 1 1

∗
4)
∗1) Contains cautions for use regarding the instrument.

∗2) A paper based manual (S228-90475) is available at a fee.
∗
3) They have been formed to suitable shapes to install in the autosampler. Do not deform these tubing assemblies.
∗4) In the case of pumping tetrahydrofuran (THF), chloroform, etc. used in GPC analysis, do not use this fitting. PEEK ferrules may be
deformed, and the leakage may occur.
NOTE
The parts of No.27, 28, 29, and 30 are used to extend rinse solution inlet tubing or to connect the suction filter
ASSY directly without using a degassing unit.
1-10 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1.5 Optional Parts
1.5 Optional Parts

1
Optional units available for this instrument are listed below.
Check the User Manual included with the optional equipment for installation instructions.
For information about other optional units not listed below, contact your Shimadzu representative.
 Optional Sample Loop

Since the optional sample loop is smaller in capacity than the standard sample loop, after a gradient analysis
at a low flow rate the mobile phase composition will return to the initial concentration in a short time before
starting the next analysis.
Since the maximum injection volume is 50 L, the sample measuring speed must be set at 5 L/sec or less. If
the speed is fast, the volume of injection may not be precise or may be reproduced incorrectly.
Part Part No.
Sample loop ASSY (50 µL injection) S228-45402-96
Used to increase the amount of sample injected.
Part Part No.
Sample Loop ASSY (for 2 mL injection) S228-45405-94
Sample Loop ASSY (for 500 µL injection) S228-45405-93
 Rinsing Pump
To rinse the sampling needle with two or more types of rinse solutions.
Part Part No.
Rinsing Pump ASSY S228-43042-91
SIL-20A/20AC 1-11
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
 Maintenance Kit
The maintenance kit consists of major consumable parts and tubing parts.
"9.5.3 Maintenance Kit" P. 9-37
Part Part No. Remark
High-pressure valve rotor,

Maintenance kit for SIL-20A/20AC S228-45413-95 low-pressure valve rotor, etc.
are included.
High-pressure valve rotor,

Maintenance kit for SIL-20AHT/20ACHT S228-45413-96 low-pressure valve rotor, etc.
are included.
High-pressure valve rotors

or measuring pump's
plunger seals whose
Maintenance kit for SIL-20A/20AC/20AHT/20ACHT S228-45413-97
replacement interval is
relatively long are not
included.
 Vespel Needle Seal (For SIL-20AHT/20ACHT)

To use solvents for the GPC method, such as tetrahydrofuran (THF) and chloroform.
Part Part No. Applicable pH range
Vespel needle seal S228-48258-91 1 to 9
CAUTION
Do not use PEEK tubing when performing GPC analysis since PEEK tubing is not strong enough for this
purpose. The tubing may break and the solvent may splash.
Also, do not use the mobile phase that contains Hexafluoroisopropanol (HFIP) with either PEEK or
stainless tubing. It may weaken the resin such as Vespel and PEEK and cause the solvent to splash.
NOTE
Refer to "8.2 Replacing Needle Seal" for the installation instruction.
1-12 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1.5 Optional Parts
 Small-Capacity PEEK Needle Seal

To be used for achieving higher separation with very high speed analysis using Prominence UFLC.
The capacity is reduced to about one third of that of the standard needle seal.
1
Wetted flow line material:

PEEK
Parts included:
Needle seal XR kit • Needle seal (1 pc.)
S228-50452-92
1, 2 • Housing (1 pc.)
• Cap (1 pc.)
• Instruction Manual
(1 copy)
1 When removing or mounting the needle seal XR, a spanner 8  10 (Part No. S086-03006) and the dedicated removal tool (Part No.
S228-50570) are required.
A spanner 8  10 is provided as standard while the removal tool is not. Please purchase a removal tool as well when purchasing a
needle seal XR for the first time.
2 If you purchase an additional needle seal XR for replacement, select any of the following three types depending on the part you need
to replace.
Part Part Type Part No. Parts Included
Needle seal XR Consumable part S228-50390 Needle seal: 1 pc.
Housing, needle seal XR Repair part S228-50391 Needle seal housing: 1 pc.
Consumable part Needle seal: 3 pcs

Needle seal XR kit S228-50452-93
/ Repair part Needle seal housing: 1 pc.
NOTE
For details about the mounting procedure, refer to the instruction manual packed with the needle seal XR kit
(S228-50452-92).
Needle seal Cap
Removal
tool
Needle seal
housing
SIL-20A/20AC 1-13
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
 Tubing for Column Connection

Used to connect from high-pressure valve port No. 5 to the inlet of the column.
The ends of tubing are 1.6 mm in outer diameter for connection while the other portions are as thin as 0.8 mm
in outer diameter to make routing easier.
The column connection attachment is used for connecting a SUS pipe ID 0.1  600 to the column. Depending
on the column type or manufacturer, the connection port shape may vary. Due to the difference in the
connection port shape, cross contamination may occur or peaks may be affected. By replacing the column
connection attachment with a new one, the connection to the column of a different manufacturer can be made
correctly.
Part Part Type Part No. Remark
ID 0.1 mm, length 600 mm

SUS tubing ID 0.1  600 Consumable part S228-48826-92
Fitting parts: 1 set
Tubing ID 0.1 mm, length

60 mm
Column connection attachment Consumable part S228-50568-91
Coupling
Fitting parts: 1 set
 SUS Housing Valve Kit (For SIL-20A/20AC)

To be used to modify the SIL-20A/20AC for the maximum allowable pressure of 35 MPa (SIL-20AHT/
20ACHT).
Part Part No.
SUS housing valve kit for SIL-20A/20AC S228-46913-96
 GPC Kit (For SIL-20A/20AC)

To perform GPC analysis with SIL-20A/20AC.
(Only difference from the SUS housing valve kit is a needle seal.)
Part Part No. Available pH range
GPC kit for SIL-20A/20AC S228-46606-96 1 to 9
 Inert Kit (For SIL-20A/20AC)

To be used for mobile phase flow path of SIL-20A/20AC to be inert (metal-free) to perform analysis used
sample which can be changed activity by the metal material or analysis used high concentrated salt solutions
which corrode metal.
Part Part No. Applicable Pressure
Water 20.0 MPa

Inert Kit for SIL-20A/20AC S228-61451-41
Solvent 14.7 MPa
Extended Sample Loop for Inert Kit for SIL-20A/20AC Water 20.0 MPa
S228-45405-43
(Sample loop for 500 µL Injection) Solvent 9.8 MPa
1-14 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1.5 Optional Parts
 SIL-20A/CXR Modification Kit (SIL-20A/20AC/20AHT/20ACHT)

To be used to modify the SIL-20A/20AC/20AHT/20ACHT for the maximum allowable pressure of 66 MPa
(SIL-20AXR/20ACXR).
1
Part Part No.
XR modification kit for SIL-20A/20AC/20AHT/20ACHT S228-50368-92
NOTE
When the instrument has been modified with this modification kit, the Expansion Loop Base Kit (Part
No. S228-61450-41) is required for using the 500 µL or 2 mL option loop.
Set the upper limit for the injection volume depending on the capacity of the sample loop connected.
"[MAX Inj. Volume]" P. 5-35
 Sample Racks
Please select according to the purpose and content of analysis.
Contact your Shimadzu representative regarding recommended microtiter plates.
Screen
Name Vial Type, Volume Capacity For Model Part No.
Display
1-mL Vial Rack
A and C
1 mL-C Glass 1 mL 175 vials S228-37614-92
models
1.5-mL Vial Rack
Glass 1.1 mL, 1.5 mL,

1.5 mL Glass w/spacer 0.3 mL, 105 vials A models S228-45409-92
Plastic (PP) 1 mL, 0.2 mL
1.5-mL Vial Cooling

Rack (70 vials)

1.5 mL-C Glass w/spacer 0.3 mL, 70 vials C models S228-44617-92
SIL-20A/20AC 1-15
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
Screen
Name Vial Type, Volume Capacity For Model Part No.
Display
1.5-mL Vial Cooling

Rack (105 vials)

1.5 mL Glass w/spacer 0.3 mL, 105 vials C models S228-50761-92
Plastic (PP) 0.2 mL, 1 mL
4-mL Vial Rack
Glass 4 mL,
Plastic (PP) 4 mL, A and C
4 mL-C 50 vials S228-37616-92
0.3 mL to accommodate models
4 mL vials
Microtiter Plate Rack
MTP-96, Microtiter plates A and C

2 plates S228-37545-92
MTP-384 (96-well, 384-well) models
Deep-well Plate Rack
DWP-96, Deep-well plates A and C

2 plates S228-37546-92
DWP-384 (96-well, 384-well) models

A and C
Control Vial Rack CntR Glass w/spacer 0.3 mL, 10 vials S228-44634-91
models
For optional rack changer

A and C
Rack-changer Rack Changer Microtiter plates (96-well) 1 plate S228-45499-92
models
Deep-well plate (96-well)
1-16 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1.5 Optional Parts
Target Temperature Control Performance (C Models Only)

The following table indicates the temperature control performance when using various types of optional
sample racks.
1
Plate Name Temperature Control Performance*
1-mL vial rack Vial bottom temperature = temperature setting 3 C
1.5-mL vial cooling rack (70 vials or 105 vials) Vial bottom temperature = temperature setting 3 C
4-mL vial rack Vial bottom temperature = temperature setting 3 C
Microtiter plate rack Well bottom temperature = temperature setting 6 C
Deep-well plate rack Well bottom temperature = temperature setting 6 C
(Note *)
The following table indicates the temperature control performance when using various types of optional
sample racks.
Sample Rack Name Environment Liquid Volume Vial Used Measurement Site
1-mL vial rack 30 C 70% Water 700 L Glass vial Vial bottom center
1.5-mL vial cooling rack

30 C 70% Water 1 mL Glass vial Vial bottom center
(70 vials or 105 vials)
4-mL vial rack 30 C 70% Water 3 mL Glass vial Vial bottom center
Microtiter plate rack Nalge Nunc round bottom

30 C 70% Water 200 µL Well center
(96-well, 384-well) plate
Deep-well plate rack (96-well) 30 C 70% Water 1 mL Nalge Nunc flat-bottom plate Well center
SIL-20A/20AC 1-17
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
 Vials
The following types of vials can be used in the sample racks.
Part Capacity Material Part No. Application Remark
4-mL Vial
Borosilicate
4 mL S228-21287-91 General
glass
× 4-mL Vial 4 mL Polypropylene S228-31537-91 General
1.5-mL Vial 100 ea. w/cap and

silicone rubber
Borosilicate
1.5 mL S228-15652-92 General septum
glass
1.1-mL Vial
General and
Borosilicate small-capacity
× 1.1 mL S228-21283-91
glass Needle stroke is
less than 50 mm
1-mL Vial
General and 200 ea. w/cap
Polypropylene
small-capacity (See TIP
× 1 mL Cap: S228-31600-91
Needle stroke is " Vial Material"
polyethylene
less than 50 mm P. 1-19.)
Borosilicate
glass
1-mL Vial 1 mL S228-39699-91 General 250 ea. w/cap
Cap:
polyethylene
0.3-mL Vial
Small-capacity 100 ea. w/cap and

Borosilicate
× 300 µL S228-16847-92 Needle stroke is silicone rubber
glass
less than 50 mm septum
Borosilicate
0.3-mL Vial (Spares) 300 µL S228-16850-91 100 ea.
glass
0.3-mL Vial
100 ea. w/spring,
Borosilicate used inserted into
× 300 µL S228-21284-91 Small-capacity
glass aforementioned 4-
mL vial
Borosilicate
0.3-mL Vial (Spares) 300 µL S228-21285-91 100 ea.
glass
1-18 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1.5 Optional Parts
1
Part Capacity Material Part No. Application Remark
0.2-mL Vial Disposable vials

100 ea. w/cap
Polypropylene for small-capacity
(See TIP
× 200 µL Cap: S228-35217-91 analysis
" Vial Material"
polyethylene Needle stroke is
P. 1-19.)
less than 50 mm
1.5-mL Vial
Silicone Rubber Silicone rubber 1.1-mL Vial
- S221-26718-93 100 ea.
Septum w/PTFE cover 0.3-mL Vial
(S228-16847-92)
PTFE Septum - PTFE S228-15655-91 Same above 100 ea.
Silicone Rubber Silicone rubber

- S228-21290-91 4-mL Vial 100 ea.
Septum w/PTFE cover
PTFE Septum - PTFE S228-23469-91 4-mL Vial 100 ea.

PTFE (Poly Tetra-Fluoro Ethylene)
NOTE
Using Sample Cooler

Vials marked with a  may have different thermal conductivity properties due to the shape or material of the
vial. Consequently, there may be circumstances in which the sample cooler set temperature and the internal
temperature of the vials may differ.
NOTE
Vial Material
Both glass and plastic (polypropylene) vials are available for use, however, to prevent problems during
analysis the following precautions should be observed when selecting the type of vial.
Glass Vials
There is a possibility that ionic substances, such as acids or bases, may be adsorbed onto the glass surface.
If ionic substances are analyzed under these circumstances, precision will be poor and the reliability of the
analysis will be lost. When using glass vials, employ a sample solvent to restrict adsorption of the substance.
The following kinds of sample solvents are used.
• 10 mM to 100 mM aqueous perchloric acid solution or a mixture of that and an organic solvent.
(Use acetonitrile, methanol, or ethanol as the organic solvent.)
• An organic solvent solution of 10 mM trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
(Use acetonitrile, methanol, or ethanol as the organic solvent. However, trifluoroacetic acid will be detected
when detecting absorbance in the 200 nm to 220 nm range.)
In the event that one of these sample solvents cannot be used, use a plastic vial. Note that alkalis and
hydrogen fluorides will chemically attack glass.
SIL-20A/20AC 1-19
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
Plastic Vials
The hydrophobic properties of substances are the cause of surface adsorption in plastic vials. The precision
of analysis will be poor in this situation as well. The higher the polarity of the sample solvent, the greater the
effect. The adsorption of hydrophobic substances can be suppressed through the use of low-polarity sample
solvents, but if the polarity is too low, the possibility arises of additives in the plastic dissolving off the surface
of the vial. Consequently, use the following sample solvents.
• Mixtures of water or a buffering solution with an organic solvent.
The organic solvent content should be 20% to 50% (V/V). (Use acetonitrile, methanol, or ethanol as the
organic solvent.)
In the event that one of these sample solvents cannot be used, use a glass vial. As discussed above, note
that organic solvents promote the deformation of plastic.
 Microtiter Plates
When using a sample cooler, do not use microtiter
plates with a raised bottom, shallow wells, and a gap
above 2 mm between the bottom of the wells and the
bottom of the plate. Using this type of plate will create a
gap between the cooling plate on the rack and the
microtiter plate or deep-well plate. Water condensation
may occur in this gap, making it impossible to obtain
accurate analysis results.
Gap: 2 mm and under
Fig. 1.10
It is recommended that the following microtiter plates or deep-well plates and corresponding mats are used
with this autosampler.
1) Well-inset sealing mat

Plate Type Product Name (Manufacturer) Remark
Material: polypropylene,
Microtiter plate 267245 series (NUNC)
capacity: 0.5 mL
278752 (NUNC)
capacity: 2 mL
Deep-well plate
P-DW-20-C (AXYGEN)
capacity: 2 mL
AM-2ML-RD (AXYGEN) Material: silicone
276011 (NUNC) Material: silicone

Mat
Material: thermoplastic elastomer
276002 series (NUNC)
* Not available with Rack Changer II
1-20 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1.5 Optional Parts
2) Heat sealing mat

Plate Type Product Name (Manufacturer) Remark 1
Microtiter plate 4Ti-0110 (4titude)
capacity: 0.3 mL
Deep-well plate 4Ti-0130 (4titude)
capacity: 1.85 mL
Easy Peel
AB-0745 (ABgene)
Peel-Seal
4Ti-0521 (4titude)
Mat Pierce-Seal
4Ti-0531 (4titude)
Permanent Sheet PP
298-37851
(Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
3) Adhesive sealing mat

Plate Type Product Name (Manufacturer) Remark
Microtiter plate 267245 series (NUNC)
capacity: 0.5 mL
278752 (NUNC)
capacity: 2 mL
Deep-well plate
P-DW-20-C (AXYGEN)
capacity: 2 mL
Material: upper: polyethylene,

NAL-96 Sealing Film lower: polypropylene
Mat
2923-5000 (USA SCIENTIFIC) * No adhesives at wells
* Exclusive for 96-well plates
NOTE
The sealing mats having the features (1) and (2) described below may cause the needle or needle seal flow
line to be clogged. If you use such a sealing mat, pay careful attention to clogging.
(1) Adhesive-backed mats (adhesive on the entire face that will contact the plate)
Regardless of the sample solvent type, as the instrument is used, the adhesive may attach to the external
needle surface and the internal surface of the flow line, causing sample aspiration or peak area
calculation to fail, or clogging of the flow line.
(2) Mats made of PET (polyethylene terephthalate)

If the sample solvent is acetonitrile based or DMSO based, the mat is likely to swell and may be creased
after sealing, impairing airtightness.
When the sample solvent is water based or methanol based, there will be no problem in practical use.
SIL-20A/20AC 1-21
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
1. Configuration
 Rack Changers II
Rack changers make it possible to perform analysis with up to 12 microtiter plates or deep-well plates.
S228-45164-31
S228-45164-32
S228-45164-38
Rack Changer II S228-45164-41 With rack cooling function
S228-45164-42
S228-45164-48
S228-45164-58
 1.5-mL Vial Plate Kit for Rack Changer II

Serial analysis is possible with up to twelve 1.5-mL vial plates using Rack Changer II and this kit.
One 1.5-mL vial plate can hold a maximum of 54 vials.
Three 1.5-mL vial plates (for one stack) are

1.5-mL vial plate kit (3 plates) S228-50830-91 included.
If you use 12 plates, 4 kits are required.
When using 1.5 mL sample vial plates on the Rack Changer/C not equipped with a window on the front panel,
be sure to use the Extended Plate Kit for Rack Changer (part No.: S228-50829-91).
NOTE
This kit can be operated on any of the work stations (or the driver) shown below.
Work Station CBM-20A/20Alite Applicable Unit Version
LCsolution Ver. 1.24 and later
LCMSsolution Ver. 3.50 and later
LabSolutions LC Ver. 5.30 and later SIL-20A/20AC series Ver. 1.21 and later
LabSolutions DB/CS Ver. 6.00 and later Ver. 1.20 and later Rack Changer/C Ver. 1.11 and later
Rack Changer II Ver. 2.00 and later
LabSolutions LCMS Ver. 5.00 and later
Shimadzu LC driver Ver. 2.00 SP1 and later

(Empower1/Empower2)
1-22 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2 Parts Identification and Function
2
Contents
2.1 Front Section Interior........................................................................................ 2-2

2.2 Back ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3 Names and Functions of Display Panel and Keypad ....................................... 2-5
2. Parts Identification and Function
2.1 Front Section Interior
Keypad
To operate and configure settings.
Press to show the operation keys.
Display panel Right cover

Comprising the display Opened by pressing on the top-left
screen and LED indicators. corner.
Displays operational settings.
Panel F
(When using the
door sensor function,
P.2-3 injection can be
at the left performed only if
panel F is attached.)
P.2-3
at the right
Front door Measuring pump Low-pressure valve

Measures samples. Switches the rinse solution flow
line.
2-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2.1 Front Section Interior
Needle Rinsing port 2

Aspirates the samples. Rinses the needle.
The port on the far side is the standard rinsing port. Here,
the needle is dipped in rinse solution and the outside of
the needle is rinsed.
The port on the near side is the rinsing pump's rinsing
port. Here, the outside of the needle is rinsed with a rinse
solution different from the standard one.
Injection port
The samples are injected
here.
Sample rack Control vial rack High-pressure valve

For holding vials. For setting vials.
SIL-20A/20AC 2-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2.2 Back
Houses the CBM-20Alite.
Fuse holders
Power cord connector
Changer connector
[REMOTE] connector External input/output terminals

Connects to the CBM-20A
or the SCL-10Avp.
2-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2.3 Names and Functions of Display Panel and Keypad
2.3 Names and Functions of Display

Panel and Keypad
This instrument is controlled through the keypad.
2
The display panel allows verification of the instruments
Display panel
status.
NOTE
The display panel may become hot when in use.
Keypad
2.3.1 Display Panel

  
The display panel consists of a display screen and LED
indicators. L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
Names and functions of the screen areas and the READY
indicators are given below.
    
No. Display or Indicator Function
 Rack display Displays the model of the sample rack set in the autosampler.
When connected to a Rack Changer II and using a rack-changer rack,

[CHG-LINK] is displayed. When connected to the SCL-10Avp in HT
 Status display 1
compatible mode, [HT MODE] is displayed.
"[OP MODE]" P. 5-82
 Control vial rack display Indicates whether or not there is a control vial rack.
 Status display 2 Displays the status of operation.
 start LED Illuminates when sample injection starts.
SIL-20A/20AC 2-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
No. Display or Indicator Function
 STAT LED Priority analysis indicator ON when priority analysis is executed.
Remote control mode indicator ON when the instrument is controlled

 remote LED
by system controller.
Illuminates when using a sample cooler (i.e., with the C models).

 cooler LED Flashes if the monitor temperature is not within 1 C of the set
temperature.
Green : when power is ON.

 Status indicator Red : when an error is generated.
Orange : during sleep mode.
2.3.2 Keypad
The 27 keys on the keypad are used to operate the

instrument and set parameters.
Key Name Function
Display key To show the operation keys.
Used to select auxiliary functions.

Function key
Scrolls backward through VP functions.
Press this key while setting auxiliary functions to go back to the

Back key
previous setting screen.
Activates edit mode for repeat injection table or analysis

Edit key
sequence table (from initial screen).
Initializes the screen.

CE Clear key  Cancels values input since [Enter] was last pressed.
 Clears error messages and cancels alarms.
Deletes the set line in the repeat injector table or the sample
Delete key
table.
For adding lines to the repeat injection or analysis sequence

Insert key
table.
2-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2.3 Names and Functions of Display Panel and Keypad
Key Name Function
For performing the operations for arrow keys indicated in the top
part of the numeric keypad.
shift Shift key When this key is pressed, [Shift pressed] appears on the display
screen. Press any key or shift again to cancel [Shift
pressed]. 2
For entering the well number when using a microtiter plate or a
ABC - WXYZ Letter keys
deep-well plate.
For moving the cursor to the left on table parameter setting

screens in the repeat injection or analysis sequence table.
Left cursor key For moving from the initial screen directly to the special rack
removal setting (REMOVE RACK) screen when a Rack
Changer II is connected.
For moving the cursor to the right on table parameter setting

Right cursor key
screens in the repeat injection or analysis sequence table.
Shift +
For moving the cursor up on table parameter setting screens in

the repeat injection or analysis sequence table.
Up cursor key
For moving from the initial screen directly to the needle position
moving (ZHOME) screen.
For moving the cursor down on table parameter setting screens

in the repeat injection or analysis sequence table.
Down cursor key
For moving from the initial screen directly to the rinse solution
flow line purging (MANUAL PURGE) screen.
For entering numerical values.

- Numeric keypad Pressing the key moves from the initial screen directly
to the needle position moving (Z HOME) screen.
Enter key Validates input values.
For displaying a minus sign on the cooler temperature setting

screen.
Minus key
For moving from the initial screen directly to the rinse solution
flow line purging (MANUAL PURGE) screen.
Starts sample injection.

start Start key
Stops sample injection.
rinse Rinse key For rinsing needle in rinse solution.
Pumps rinse solution through flow lines for a specified period of

Purge key
time.
VP key For switching from initial screen to VP mode.
Turns off display screen.

Sleep key
Has no effect on operation.
SIL-20A/20AC 2-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3 Preparation
3
Contents
3.1 Turning Power ON/OFF ................................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Rinse Solution and Waste Containers Preparation .......................................... 3-3
3.3 Rinse Solution Selection .................................................................................. 3-4
3.4 Purging Air Bubbles ......................................................................................... 3-6
3.5 Preparing Samples........................................................................................... 3-7
3. Preparation
3.1 Turning Power ON/OFF
1 Press the power switch to turn the power ON.

Press it again to turn the power OFF.
Press in Press again

(ON) (OFF)
Fig. 3.1
2 When the power is first turned on, all the dots in

the display matrix and all the indicators illuminate,
as shown on the right. ™™™™™™™™™™™™™™™™
™™™™™™™ ™™™™™™™™™
3 The memory is automatically tested, and after the

memory check passes, the version number of the
control program is displayed momentarily. SIL-20AC V*.**
The status indicators turns green.
The screen displays the ROM version [V.].
Initial Screen
4 When the needle is in the standby state (in the

injection port position), the initial screen on the
right appears on the display. L:none /R:none
READY
NOTE
• If there is a large amount of data to be backed up,

such as when there are many lines set in the sample
table, it may take a while before initialization starts.
• If an error is detected, an alarm sounds and an error
message appears.
"6.3 Error Messages" P. 6-10
3-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3.2 Rinse Solution and Waste Containers Preparation
3.2 Rinse Solution and Waste

Containers Preparation
Prepare the rinse solution and waste containers before connecting the plumbing.
WARNING 3
Do not use cracked or damaged waste container(s). They could be broken.
CAUTION
The waste container must be positioned lower than the instrument (for example, on the floor). If it is
positioned higher than the instrument, liquid will not be drained, and will leak from the connections.
Check that the drain tubings are attached in the way shown in the following diagram. (The upper outlet is
for the rinse solution, the center outlet is for condensation (only with C models) and the lower outlet is for
liquid leaked inside the equipment.) Attach a drain tubing adapter (accessory) to the mouth of the waste
container, and make sure that the tip of the drain tubing connected to the rinse solution outlet is not
immersed in the waste. If the tip of the drain tubing is immersed in the waste, the waste solution may flow
inside of the instrument and may break the instrument.
Attach the drain

tubing adapter.
Make sure that the tip of the
drain tubing is not immersed
in the waste.
Fig. 3.2
SIL-20A/20AC 3-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3. Preparation
3.3 Rinse Solution Selection

Select the rinse solution as follows, depending on the mobile phase.
For reversed phase, ion exchange, and aqueous normal phase

• The ratio of methanol to water should be 50/50. If precipitation occurs upon sample contact, select a rinse
solution without salts, as for the mobile phase.
• When the target compound is acid, base, or ionic substance, and sample is likely to remain on the outside
surface of the needle, add acid such as formic acid and acetic acid to the organic solvent of methanol,
acetonitrile, etc., or use a 0.1% TFA solution or organic solvent solution, or their mixture solution.
For non-aqueous normal phase, GPC

• Use the same solvent (s) used for the mobile phase.
• When the target compound is an acid, base, or ionic substance, and rinse mode is required, use a 0.1%
TFA aqueous solution, an organic solvent solution, or a mixture of both.
CAUTION
When using a highly volatile acid for rinse solution:
If rinse solution contains highly volatile acids (1% or higher formic acid or acetic acid solution, 0.1% or
higher TFA solution, etc.), follow the instructions given below. If analysis is continued for a long time with
such a rinse solution, volatile components may cause metals in the instrument to corrode.
• When the analysis is complete, purge the rinse solution with water or methanol that does not include any acids, and
open the front door to ventilate the instrument.
• Avoid using a solution that contains an acid concentration higher than those listed above. Dilute the solution
sufficiently before use.
3-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3.3 Rinse Solution Selection
CAUTION
When using a buffer solution for mobile phase:
If a buffer solution is used for mobile phase, follow the instructions given below. Depending on the type of
buffer solution, tubing may become clogged.
• During injection from an autosampler, rinse solution and mobile phase are mixed in the tubing that extends between
the high-pressure valve and the measuring pump. Before use, confirm that salts do not precipitate when rinse
solution and mobile phase are mixed.
When sample is injected, the flow lines shown with solid lines in Fig. 3.3 are filled with rinse solution. Those
shown with dashed lines are filled with mobile phase. The high-pressure valve rotates before measuring sample
as shown in Fig. 3.4 and compresses the mobile phase under high pressure, from high-pressure valve port Nos.
3
1 and 2. Depending on the pumping pressure, rinse solution and mobile phase may be mixed in the circled area
in the figure, which may result in salt deposition.
Rinsing port Sample loop

Measuring pump
Mobile phase
2 1
Low-
pressure
3 valve 5
4
Manual syringe Rinse solution 2 Solvent delivery
1 module
3 6
4 5
Column
High-pressure valve
(Inject)
Fig. 3.3
Rinsing port
Measuring pump
Sample loop
Mobile phase and
2 1 rinse solution may
Low-
pressure partly be mixed.
3 valve 5
4
60 module
Rinse solution 3 6
Needle 4 5
Column
High-pressure valve
(Load)
Fig. 3.4
• To prevent salt precipitation, it is recommended that the organic solvent concentration of rinse solution be lowered
to 50% or less when using a buffer solution exceeding a concentration of 50 mmol.
SIL-20A/20AC 3-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3. Preparation
3.4 Purging Air Bubbles

Air bubbles are likely to appear in the tubing when the instrument has been inactive for a prolonged period or
when the room temperature changes.
Air bubbles inside the flow lines will adversely affect sample injection precision. Before starting analysis, air
bubbles must be purged with the PURGE function.
Also, perform the purge operation in the following cases:
• When the autosampler has not been used for a long period
• When the rinse solution has been changed
• When the room temperature has changed
NOTE
When replacing the solvent with an incompatible solvent, first replace with a compatible solvent as an
intermediate rinse solution before replacing with the desired solvent.
1 Press CE to return to the initial screen.
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
NOTE READY
When the [RINSE SPEED] is 35 µL/s, the purging flow
rate is about 0.3 mL/min. Recommend to set 25 min at
[PURGE TIME] for replacing with a new solvent in the
flow line completely.
To change the PURGE TIME, refer to "[PURGE TIME]"
P. 5-19.
2 Press .
Rinse solution will be applied to purge the flow
lines. PURGING LINE
TIME LEFT 4.0
NOTE
To stop purging in mid-operation, press again.

Purging will stop as soon as the pump has discharged all
of its rinse solution.
If the rinse solution flow line is connected to a degassing

unit with a large internal capacity, the whole flow line
may not be filled with rinse solution with one purge
operation. In this case, repeat the purge operation 2 or 3
times until rinse solution is discharged from the drain
outlet.
3-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3.5 Preparing Samples
3.5 Preparing Samples
CAUTION
If insoluble substances, such as dust or solids, are mixed in the mobile phase or sample, the high-
3
pressure valve stator or rotor or the outlet tubing in the flow line may be clogged.
Besides the sliding surface on the high-pressure valve stator or rotor may be scratched, resulting in leaks
within a very short time.
To prevent the entry of dust or solids, filter the mobile phase and sample through the membrane filter
(0.45 m or 0.22 m) beforehand.
High-viscosity samples may not be injected correctly according to the volume setting. Dilute high-viscosity
samples before use.
1 Completely dissolve the sample in a solvent with

an identical or similar composition to the mobile
Sample
phase.
2 Filter the sample through a membrane filter.
Membrane filter
Fig. 3.5
3 Carefully load the sample(s) into a vial or

microtiter plate well.
Cap
Septum
(light color)
Septum
PTFE seat
(dark color)
Vial
Fig. 3.6
CAUTION
• When loading into a vial, place the silicon septum on the vial so that the PTFE surface is facing down
(liquid side) before attaching the cap.
If the septum is positioned incorrectly, the solvent may dissolve the silicon rubber.
• Only use vial septum provided by Shimadzu.
Septum provided by other vendors may produce fragments that could clog the flow line or may prevent
successful penetration by the needle.
SIL-20A/20AC 3-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3. Preparation
3-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4 Basic Operation
4
Contents
4.1 Preparing the Samples..................................................................................... 4-2

4.2 Creating an Analysis Sequence Table ............................................................. 4-7
4.3 Starting Injection............................................................................................. 4-11
4.4 Stopping Injection........................................................................................... 4-12
4.5 Finishing Injection .......................................................................................... 4-13
4.6 Rinsing ........................................................................................................... 4-14
4. Basic Operation
4.1 Preparing the Samples
CAUTION
Condensation may occur with the C models if the door is left open while the cooler is performing
temperature regulation. Also, when using the door sensor, the autosampler will not operate if the front
door is open.
4.1.1 Setting Samples in the Sample Rack

There are several types of vial racks available — 1 mL, 1.5 mL, 1.5 mL cooling, 4 mL, microtiter plate, and
deep-well plate.
"1.5 Optional Parts" P. 1-11
The upper surface of the rack is marked with numbers at the vial positions. Specify these numbers when
setting sample number parameters.
1 Open the door.
Fig. 4.1
2 Place the vial in the sample rack with the cap

facing up.
Vial Sample rack
Fig. 4.2
4-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3 Slide the sample rack along the guides all the way
to the back of the instrument. The sample rack
clicks into place when it is inserted correctly.
CAUTION
If the sample rack is not inserted correctly, the needle
may miss the vial opening and become bent.
4
Fig. 4.3
4 Close the door.
Fig. 4.4
SIL-20A/20AC 4-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4. Basic Operation
4.1.2 Setting Samples in Microtiter Plates

When a microtiter plate is used for the first time or replaced with a different type of microtiter plate (96-well,
384-well, deep well), the sampling position intervals must be calibrated. This is referred to as the [teaching]
procedure.
"[ADJUST MTP]" P. 5-71
1 Open the door.
2 Set the microtiter plate(s) in the MTP rack.

Set so that A1 well comes to left front. Microtiter plates
NOTE
Up to two microtiter plates can be used.
MTP rack
Fig. 4.5
3 Slide the MTP rack all the way to the back of the
instrument. The MTP rack clicks into place when it
is inserted correctly.
"Fig. 4.3" P. 4-3
4 Close the door.
 About the MTP Rack

The MTP rack position is as in the right figure.
2
Microtiter plates
Fig. 4.6
4-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4.1.3 Setting Samples Using a Sample Cooler (Only C Models)

If the vials are cooled, the cooler LED illuminates.
 Set the Vial
1 Inject sample into the vial.

1 mL 1.5 mL 4 mL
NOTE
4
The amount of sample introduced into the vial must not
exceed the corresponding height shown on the right. If
more than this amount is introduced, sufficient cooling of
15 mm max. 15 mm max. 27 mm max.
the liquid may not be possible.
(approx. 450 µL (approx. 1 mL (approx. 2 mL
max.) max.) max.)
Fig. 4.7
2 Press the latch of front side of the cover to open

the cover.
Fig. 4.8
3 Place the vial in the sample rack with the cap

facing up.
Vial Sample rack
Fig. 4.9
SIL-20A/20AC 4-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4. Basic Operation
4 Insert the hooks on rear side of the cover into

square holes at the rear side on the sample rack.
hooks
holes
Fig. 4.10
5 The cover clicks if closed correctly.
Fig. 4.11
4-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4.2 Creating an Analysis Sequence Table
4.2 Creating an Analysis Sequence

Table
The procedure for creating a sample table is described below using an actual example.
The procedure for creating the following sample table is described using the settings for line 0. The line
number is set automatically.
NOTE
This is not usable when the system controller CBM-20A/20Alite or SCL-10Avp is connected. 4
Sample table example
line rack from to rep inj volume runtime
0 1 1 9 10 20 5.00
1 1 20 30 10 10 10.00
2 1 30 39 1 10 30.00
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
2 Press .
The analysis sequence table title screen will be
briefly displayed, and then replaced by the Editing
parameter setting screen. Sample Table
Explanation of parameter setting screen

 Line number
 Rack number     
 Initial vial number  
 Last vial number
 Number of repeat injections
 Injection volume (µL)
 Analysis time (min)
SIL-20A/20AC 4-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4. Basic Operation
3 Use the numeric keypad to enter the rack number

[1], and press .
The cursor will move to the [from] field. 0 1 ™ 1 1 1
10 10.00
NOTE
When using a Rack Changer II, set rack numbers from 1

to 12.
Enter [0] to inject from the control vial rack.
4 Use numeric keypad to enter the number [1] of the

first vial to be injected, and press .
The cursor will move to the [to] field. 0 1 1 ™ 1 1
When using a microtiter or deep-well plate, enter 10 10.00
the combination of an alphabetic character and
number, such as "A01".
"[MTP ORDER]" P. 5-27
NOTE
Only the line number and rack number are displayed on

a new parameter setting screen.
5 Enter [9], the number of the last vial to be injected,

by numeric keypad and press .
The cursor will move to the [rep] field. 0 1 1 9 ™1
10 10.00
NOTE
If only one vial is to be injected, use the same

number as in step 4.
6 Enter [10], the number of injections to be made

repeatedly from one vial, by numeric keypad and
press . 0 11 9 10
The cursor will move to the [inj. volume] field on ™ 10 10.00
the second line.
4-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4.2 Creating an Analysis Sequence Table
7 Enter [20], the injection volume (unit: µL), by

numeric keypad and press .
The cursor will move to the [runtime] field. 0 11 9 10
20 ™0.00
NOTE
Injection volumes from 0.1 to 1 µL can be entered in

0.1 µL increments, and from 1 to 2000 µL can be entered
in 1 µL increments.
In case of injecting more than 101 L, an optional
sample loop is required. Set a value smaller than the
maximum injection volume.
4
8 Enter [5.00], the analysis time (in minutes), and
press .
The input values will be validated. 0 1 1 9 10
20 5.00
NOTE
Any value between 0.01 and 9999.9 minutes can be set.

Values higher than 1000 minutes must be in 0.1 minute
increments.
9 Press .
The sample table on the next line appears.
1 ™1
10 Perform the required settings by repeating steps 1

to 9.
NOTE
• Up to 99 lines can be set in the sample table. If a

repeat injection table is created using the procedure
described in "5.4.1 Creating a Repeat Injection Table"
P. 5-53, up to 99 lines including the number of
insertions can be set.
• If no further lines are required, press CE .
11 Press CE to go back to the initial screen.
SIL-20A/20AC 4-9
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4. Basic Operation
 Deleting a Line
1 Display the line to be deleted, using the same

procedure as when setting parameters. To display
lines greater than 1, press shift , and 0 1 1 1 1
until the desired line is displayed. 20 10.00
2 Press .
The line displayed will be deleted, and the line that 0 1
follows will be displayed. If no lines follow, the
display will be as shown on the right.
 Inserting a Line
1 Display the line number where the new line is to

be inserted by pressing shift , and
.
2 Press .
The new line will be added to the table.
4-10 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4.3 Starting Injection
4.3 Starting Injection
1 Check that the front door is closed.
2 Press start .
The start indicator on the display panel illuminates, and the autosampler injects the first specified
sample.
NOTE
When a data processor is used, it takes some time to print analysis results. To allow for this, set the
autosampler's analysis time (RUN TIME) to a value slightly longer than that of the data processor's analysis
4
time (STOP TIME). The value should allow time for the report to be printed. Note that starting the data
processing unit by the event cable (provided as standard accessory) may fail, if analysis cycle of autosampler
is shorter than that of the data processing unit.
For how to set the data processor's analysis time, refer to the data processor manual.
NOTE
If the open/close door detection is enabled and the door is opened during sample injection, operation ceases.
Operation resumes as soon as the door is closed.
3 During analysis, the display screen indicates the

status in the way shown on the right.
1) Controlled locally:    
 Number of the line being executed
 Number of the rack being executed
 Number of the vial being executed
0 1 1 1/10
 Repeat status 10 10.00 RUN
 Injection volume
 Elapsed analysis time
 Operating status
([PRET]: Injection; [RUN]: Analysis)
  
2) Controlled from a system controller:
 When [HT] is set for [OP MODE]: [HT MODE] L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
"[OP MODE]" P. 5-82 Rack 1- 1 RUN
 Operating status and number of vial being
analyzed
([PRET]: Injection; [RUN]: Analysis)
 
SIL-20A/20AC 4-11
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4. Basic Operation
4.4 Stopping Injection

There are two ways to stop the injection process. It can either be stopped temporarily (i.e., paused) or
stopped immediately.
 To Pause the Injection Process Temporarily
1 After selecting the [CONTROL] screen, press

repeatedly until [PAUSE] is displayed.
PAUSE
0:NO 1:YES
2 Select [1:YES] to return to the initial screen.
(The [start] LED will flash.)
Operation will pause when analysis of the current
sample ends.
3 When ready to resume operation (starting from

the next analysis) press start . PAUSING
 To Immediately Stop the Injection Process
1 Press start during analysis.

The message shown on the right appears on the
display, informing the operator that operation has STOPPED
stopped. RINSE REQUIRED
2 Before resuming operation, the needle is rinsed.
RINSING LINE
NOTE
When controlling the autosampler from the SCL-10Avp

system controller, restart operation by using the system
controller's rinse function.
4-12 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4.5 Finishing Injection
 Skipping Injection for Specific Vials

If a vial registered in the sample table is not set in the
sample rack, the injection operation for this vial is
skipped and continued from the next vial. When a vial is NO VIAL DETECTED
skipped, its number is displayed in the way shown on the VIAL = 1
right. Press CE to clear this display.
(When injection from a vial in the control vial rack is
skipped, [c] is displayed before the vial number (e.g.
[c1].)
4
4.5 Finishing Injection
1 Rinse the flow lines.

"4.6 Rinsing" P. 4-14
2 Press the power switch to turn the power off.

"3.1 Turning Power ON/OFF" P. 3-2
Press in Press again

(ON) (OFF)
Fig. 4.12
SIL-20A/20AC 4-13
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4. Basic Operation
4.6 Rinsing
To ensure long-term, safe, and trouble-free operation, follow these rinsing procedures when analysis have
been completed.
CAUTION
When a buffer solution has been used as a mobile phase or rinse solution, the flow lines must be cleaned
with distilled or de-ionized water.
Otherwise, any remaining buffer solution evaporates and crystallizes over time. This residue could
damage the instrument or clog the flow lines.
The mobile phase and sample flow lines must be cleaned separately. Follow the procedures below.
4.6.1 Rinsing the Mobile Phase Flow Lines
Rinsing port
Measuring pump
Sample loop
1
2
Low-
pressure
3 valve
5
4
2
module
Rinse solution
3 6
Needle 4 5
High-pressure valve
(Inject)
Fig. 4.13
1 Replace the mobile phase in the reservoir with distilled or de-ionized water.
2 Run the pump until the mobile phase in the flow lines (shown in the figure below) has been completely
replaced with water.
3 Stop the pump.
4 Replace the water in the reservoir with methanol.
4-14 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4.6 Rinsing
5 Run the pump again, until the water in the mobile phase flow lines has been completely replaced with
methanol.
6 Stop the pump.
4.6.2 Rinsing the Sample Flow Lines
1 Replace the water in the rinse solution container with distilled or de-ionized water.
2 Press .
4
Rinse solution is pumped from the measuring pump, and the flow lines are purged for 25 minutes.
NOTE
The default setting for the purge time is 25 minutes. Reset this setting if it has been changed.
"3.4 Purging Air Bubbles" P. 3-6
3 Replace the water in the rinse solution container with methanol.
4 Purge the flow lines for another 25 minutes.
4.6.3 Cleaning the High-pressure Valve

When the mobile phase is delivered at a low flow rate and a low pressure (1 MPa or less and 0.1 mL/min), the
flow line may be clogged with particles from the rotor seal of the high-pressure valve. Follow the procedure
below to solve this problem.
1 Remove the tubing from the No.5 port of the high-pressure valve (outlet tubing).
Check that there is no clog in the upstream flow lines.
2 Clean the outlet tubing by reverse-rinsing or by cutting the end of tubing to remove clogging.
If the clog cannot be removed, replace the tubing.
"8.13.2 Reverse Rinsing of the Flow Lines" P. 8-43
"8.14 Replacing Outlet Tubing" P. 8-44
3 Demount the high-pressure valve following the procedure in "8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-
Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY" P. 8-21.
Clean the rotor and stator with an ultrasonic cleaning bath.
(For use in the condition above, carry on this operation after approximately 20,000 injections.)
Replace the rotor with a new one after approximately 100,000 injections.
"8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY" P. 8-21
SIL-20A/20AC 4-15
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4. Basic Operation
4.6.4 Cleaning Rinsing Port and Rinsing Port Cover

If the leak happens at the rinsing port slope or the rinsing port slope becomes dirty, follow the procedure below
to solve these.
1 Check that the tip of the drain tubing is not

immersed in the waste. Rinsing port
cover
When the tip of the drain tubing is immersed, use
the drain tubing adapter to prevent the immersing.
"Plumbing the Rinse Solution Drain Tubing
Rinsing port
(standard accessory)" P. 9-19 slope
2 Remove the rinsing port cover.

"8.12.1 Before Replacing the Rinsing Port
Cap" P. 8-40
3 Clean the rinsing port cover and rinsing port slope

or dirty portions using wiper paper soaked with
Fig. 4.14
water carefully.
4 Return the rinsing cover following after the

procedure 4. of "8.12.2 Replacing the Rinsing Port
Cap" P. 8-40.
4-16 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5 Application Operation
5
Contents
5.1 Display Screens ............................................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Parameter in Auxiliary Functions ................................................................... 5-16
5.3 Using a Rack Changer II ................................................................................ 5-51
5.4 Setting Bracket Sequence Analysis ............................................................... 5-52
5.5 VP Functions.................................................................................................. 5-58
5.6 Control by CBM-20A or CBM-20Alite System Controller ............................... 5-94
5.7 Control by SCL-10Avp System Controller...................................................... 5-95
5. Application Operation
5.1 Display Screens
5.1.1 Types of Screens

Turn the power ON, the initial screen appears.
By pushing the keys , and , the screen can be switched from the initial screen to
one of the three screens described below.
• Auxiliary function screens
• VP function screen
• Repeat injection table setting screen or analysis sequence table setting screen
Initial screen Auxiliary function screens P.5-16
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR PARAMETER
READY Enter to Select
Auxiliary function settings.
• Parameter
• Control
• System
• Changer
VP function screens P.5-58

PRODUCT INFO
Press func or VP
VP function settings.
• Product information
• Maintenance information
• Validation support
• Calibration support
Repeat injection table setting screen* P.5-53
0 1 1 1 1
10 10.00
Used to create repeat injection tables for performing
periodic injections.
Analysis sequence table setting screen* P.4-7
0 1 1 1 1
10 10.00
Used to create sample tables for performing analysis
with standard injection operations.
 This is not usable when the system controller CBM-20A/20Alite or SCL-10Avp is connected.
5-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.1 Display Screens
5.1.2 Auxiliary Settings Screens

In this section, auxiliary settings screens are shown in the following flow diagrams.
In each screen, press to show the next screen, and press to return.
In auxiliary settings group, press to enter each group.
Press CE to return the initial screen.
Initial screen
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
Parameter settings group Sample cooler temperature setting P.5-19

PARAMETER COOLER TEMP 15
CE
Enter to Select
CE
ACTUAL TEMP 15
5
Purge time setting P.5-19
PURGE TIME 25.0

Input 0.1 - 25.0
CE
Needle rinsing operation setting P.5-20

RINSE MODE 0
Input 0-3
CE
Setting the needle's dip time P.5-20

RINSE DIPTIME 0
Input 0-60
CE
Rinse volume setting P.5-21

RINSE VOL 200
CE Input 0-2000
Rinse speed setting P.5-21
RINSE SPEED 35
Input 1-35
CE
Sample speed setting P.5-22

SAMPLE SPEED15.0
CE Input 0.1-15.0
SIL-20A/20AC 5-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Needle stroke setting P.5-22
NEEDLE STROKE 52
CE Input 17-54
Setting the type of microtiter plates

P.5-26
MTP WELL 0
CE 0:REMOTE 1:LOCAL
Setting the injection order of microtiter plates

P.5-27
MTP ORDER 0
CE 0:A1A2 1:1A1B
Setting event output P.5-29

EVENT 0
Input 0 - 123
Repeat injection table setting

P.5-29
RepeatInjTable 0
CE 0:Off 1:On
5-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.1 Display Screens
Analysis sequence table clearing

Control settings group P.5-30
CONTROL Clear SMPTBL 0

Enter to Select 0:No 1:Yes
CE CE
Repeat injection table clearing

P.5-30
Clear RepInjtbl0
CE 0:No 1:Yes
Priority analysis setting* P.5-31
STAT
CE Enter to Edit
5
Analysis pause setting P.5-32
PAUSE 0
CE 0:NO 1:YES
Purging the rinse solution flow lines

P.5-32
MANUAL PURGE 0
0:Off 1:On
CE
Moving the needle position P.5-33
ZHOME
CE Enter to Start
Checking the needle position P.5-33
TEST INJ PORT

CE Enter to Test
Purging the rinsing pump P.5-33

PURGE(Ext Pump)
CE Enter to Start
Checking the high pressure valve

 This is not usable when the system P.5-34
controller CBM-20A/20Alite or SCL-10Avp is HPV TEST
connected. CE Enter to Start
SIL-20A/20AC 5-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Local mode setting P.5-34

System settings group
LOCAL 0
SYSTEM
0:Remote 1:Local
Enter to Select CE
CE
Disable key entry P.5-34

KEY CLOSE
CE Enter to Close
Adjusting the screen brightness

P.5-35
BRIGHTNESS 3
CE
Input 1-4
Setting the needle stroke for control vial

racks P.5-35
CNT RACK STRK 52
CE Input 17 - 54
Setting the maximum volume of injection

P.5-35
MAX Inj. Volume
CE 50-2000 100uL
Setting event output 1 P.5-36

SELECT EVENT1 0
CE 0:Ev 1:St
SELECT EVENT2 0
CE 0:Ev 1:St 2:Sd

SELECT EVENT3 0
CE 0:Error 1:Event
5-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.1 Display Screens
Setting the rinsing pump's usage method

P.5-37
RINSE METHOD 0
CE Input 0-6
Setting the rising pump's rinse time

P.5-38
EXT RINSE TIME 2
CE Input 1-9
Using small-capacity vials P.5-38
CE
SMALL ID VIAL
0:Off 1:On
0
5
Switching remote connector terminals
P.5-38
CBM LINK 1
CE 0:Int 1:Ext
Setting operation of buzzer

P.5-39
BEEP MODE 0
CE
0:On 1:Alm 2:Off
Setting the loop cut function

P.5-39
CUT OFF LOOP 0
CE 0:Off 1:On
Setting the loop cut time

P.5-40
C TIME 1/ 9.9
CE
1-999/0.1-999.9
SIL-20A/20AC 5-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Displaying the Rack Changer II status

Changer settings group  P.5-43
RACK CHANGER DISP RACK STATUS
Enter to Select Enter to Display
CE CE
Setting the code for stack A P.5-43
STACK A CODE 0
CE Input 0 - 4
Setting the code for stack B P.5-44
STACK B CODE 0
CE Input 0 - 4
Setting the code for stack C P.5-44
STACK C CODE 0
CE Input 0 - 4
Setting the code for stack D P.5-44
STACK D CODE 0
CE Input 0 - 4
Setting the needle stroke for stack A

P.5-45
STACK A STRK 45
CE Input 10 - 52
Setting the needle stroke for stack B

P.5-45
STACK B STRK 45
Input 10 - 52
CE
Setting the needle stroke for stack C

P.5-46
STACK C STRK 45
Input 10 - 52
CE
 Displayed only when using the optional Rack Changer II.
5-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.1 Display Screens
Setting the needle stroke for stack D

P.5-46
STACK D STRK 45
CE Input 10 - 52
Setting removal of the special rack

P.5-47
REMOVE RACK 0
CE 0:Rack 1:Dummy
5
Changing to the next rack after sample
injection at the last well P.5-47
AUTO EXCHANGE 0
0:Off 1:On
CE
Removing the rack-changer rack

after analysis P.5-48
REMOVE DUMMY 0
0:MANUAL 1:AUTO
CE
Confirming rack operation when a

stack is installed P.5-49
RC STACK SCAN 0
0:AUTO 1:USER
CE
Deleting rack information P.5-50
Clear RACK INFO

Enter to Clear
CE
Executing all rack check operations

P.5-50
RC INITIALIZE
Enter to Start
CE
Turn on the LED inside the Rack

Changer II P.5-50
PARAMETER LED LIGHT

Enter to Select Enter to Light
CE CE
SIL-20A/20AC 5-9
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.1.3 VP Function Screens

In this section VP function screens are shown in the following flow diagrams.
Press on initial screen to show each group screen.
Press CE to return to the initial screen.
Press or to switch the settings screen within the groups selected by .
Press CE to return to the initial screen in the group.
Initial screen
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
CE READY
Product information group Displaying serial No. P.5-62
PRODUCT INFO SERIAL NUMBER

Press func or VP L20164500001
CE CE
Displaying software version No.

P.5-62
S/W ID: V1.21
CE
SIL-20AC
Displaying the Rack Changer II serial

number P.5-62
RC SERIAL NUMBER
CE L20184500001
Displaying the Rack Changer II software

version number P.5-62
RC S/W ID: V1.11

CE RACK CHANGER
5-10 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.1 Display Screens
Maintenance information group Displaying total operation time P.5-63
MAINTENANCE TOTAL OP TIME

Press func or VP 1(h)
CE CE
Displaying the usage frequency of the

needle seal P.5-63
NDL SEAL USED
CE 1/40000

high-pressure valve P.5-63
HPV SEAL USED
CE 1/100000
Displaying the usage frequency of the 5

low-pressure valve P.5-64
LPV SEAL USED
CE 1/60000

rinsing pump P.5-64
EXT PUMP USED
CE 1/700000
Needle inner rinsing P.5-64

NDLE FLUSH
CE Enter to Start
Moving the plunger position P.5-64

P-SET
CE Enter to P-SET
Automatic rotation of high-pressure valve

P.5-65
HPV ROTATION
CE Enter to Start
Automatic rotation of low-pressure valve

P.5-65
LPV ROTATION
CE Enter to Start
SIL-20A/20AC 5-11
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Input of replacement part number

P.5-65
PART REPLACEMENT
P/N: - -
CE
Displaying maintenance log P.5-66

MAINTENACE LOG
Enter to Display
CE
Displaying operation log P.5-66

OPERATION LOG
CE
Enter to Display
Displaying error log P.5-67

ERROR LOG
CE
Enter to Display
Validation support group Input of date P.5-68

VALIDATION DATE YY-MM-DD
CE Press func or VP 02-01-08
CE
Input of time P.5-68

TIME HH:MM:SS
09:05:02
CE
Memory check P.5-69

MEMORY CHECK
Enter to Start
CE
Position sensor self diagnosis

P.5-69
POSITION SENS
CE Enter to Start
Leak sensor test P.5-70

LEAK SENSOR TEST
Soak and Enter
CE
5-12 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.1 Display Screens
Password input and setting P.5-71

 Unless you enter a correct password, you cannot
Calibration support group proceed to the following items.
CALIBRATION Input PASSWORD

CE Press func or VP
CE
Microtiter plate position fine

adjustment P.5-71
ADJUST MTP
CE Enter to Start
Microtiter plate position data deleting

P.5-76
CE
ERASE MTP ADJ
Enter to Erase 5
Sample aspiration volume compensation
factor P.5-77
ASP FACTOR 0
CE 0:AUTO 1:MANUAL
Leak sensor actuation level setting P.5-79
LEAK THR 200

ActLv 62 / 255
CE
Needle seal replacement alert value

P.5-79
NDL SEAL 40000

CE
Input Alert Lv
High-pressure valve rotor seal replacement

alert value P.5-79
HPV SEAL 100000

CE Input Alert Lv
Low-pressure valve rotor seal replacement

alert value P.5-79
LPV SEAL 60000

CE
Input Alert Lv
SIL-20A/20AC 5-13
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Rinsing pump replacement alert value

P.5-80
EXT PUMP 700000
Input Alert Lv
CE
Disable auto detection of door open/close

P.5-80
CANCEL DOORSW 0
0:No 1:Yes
CE
Disable auto rack detection

P.5-81
CANCEL RACKDET 0
0:No 1:Yes
CE
Canceling vial detection P.5-82
CANCEL VIALDET 0
0:No 1:Yes
CE
Operation mode setting P.5-82
OP MODE 0
0:20A 1:HT
CE
Log clear and parameter initialization

P.5-82
INITIALIZE PARAM
CE Enter to Init
Parameter Lock input P.5-83
PARAMETER LOCK 0
0 : O f f 1:O n
CE
Change password P.5-84

CHANGE PASSWORD
Enter to Change
CE
5-14 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.1 Display Screens
Rack position fine adjustment

P.5-85
ADJUST RACK
Enter to Start
CE
Injection port position fine adjustment

P.5-86
ADJUST INJ PORT
CE Enter to Start
Rack position data deleting P.5-89

ERASE RACK.P ADJ
CE Enter to Erase
5
Injection port position data deleting
P.5-89
ERASE INJ.P ADJ
CE Enter to Erase
Sample cooler temperature calibration

P.5-89
TEMP DELTA 1.0
CE Input -3.0 - 4.0
To product information group CBM parameter setting P.5-90

PRODUCT INFO CBM PARAMETER
Press func or VP CE Enter to Set
SIL-20A/20AC 5-15
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.2 Parameter in Auxiliary Functions

There are four groups for auxiliary functions:
Parameter Setting, Control Setting, System Setting and Changer Setting.
5.2.1 List of Auxiliary Functions

The auxiliary functions are listed in the tables below.
"5.1.2 Auxiliary Settings Screens" P. 5-3
 Parameter Settings Group
NOTE
When this instrument is controlled by the system controller, values of [COOLER TEMP] through [Repeat Inj
Table] (except [EVENT]) in the Parameter Settings Group need to be set on the system controller (or the LC
workstation).
Command Description Page
For setting the sample cooler temperature.

COOLER TEMP P.5-19
The Rack Changer II (if used) is set to the same temperature.
PURGE TIME For setting the purge time. P.5-19
RINSE MODE For selecting the needle's rinsing method. P.5-20
RINSE DIPTIME For entering the needle's rinsing time. P.5-20
RINSE VOLUME For setting the replacing volume of rinse solution. P.5-21
RINSE SPEED Sets flow rate of rinse solution when replacing the solution. P.5-21
SAMPLE SPEED Sets flow rate during sample analysis. P.5-22
NEEDLE STROKE Sets needle stroke measurement. P.5-22
For setting the well number when using a microtiter plate or a deep-well
MTP WELL P.5-26
plate.
For setting the sample injection order when using a microtiter plate or a
MTP ORDER P.5-27
deep-well plate.
EVENT For controlling the external output terminals. P.5-29
Repeat Inj Table For making settings related to bracket sequence analysis. P.5-29
5-16 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Control Settings Group
NOTE
When this instrument is controlled by the system controller, [STAT] and [PAUSE] in the Control Settings Group
do not work. Set these using the functionality of the system controller (or LC workstation).
Clear SMPTBL For deleting the sample table. P.5-30
Clear Rep Inj tbl For deleting the sample table used for bracket sequence analysis. P.5-30
STAT Sets priority analysis. P.5-31
PAUSE For pausing the sequence. P.5-32
MANUAL PURGE For drawing in rinse solution with the manual syringe. P.5-32
5
Z HOME For raising the needle during transportation. P.5-33
TEST INJ PORT For checking that the needle is lowered correctly into the injection port. P.5-33
PURGE (Ext Pump) For purging with a second rinse solution using a rinsing pump (optional). P.5-33
HPV TEST For checking the high pressure valve. P.5-34
 System Settings Group

LOCAL For separating the autosampler from an external controller. P.5-34
KEY CLOSE To lock the keypad, preventing unexpected entries. P.5-34
BRIGHTNESS For adjusting the screen brightness. P.5-35
CNT RACK STRK For setting the lowering distance of the needle in the control vial rack. P.5-35
MAX Inj. Volume For setting the maximum volume of injection. P.5-35
For switching the function of event output 1 between event output and
SELECT EVENT1 P.5-36
start output.
For switching the function of event output 2 among event output, start
output, and shutdown output.
For switching the function of event output 3 between error output and
event output.
For setting the needle's rinsing method when using a rinsing pump
RINSE METHOD P.5-37
(optional).
For setting the needle's rinsing time when using a rinsing pump
EXT RINSE TIME P.5-38
(optional).
SMALL ID VIAL Set when using small-capacity vials. P.5-38
CBM LINK To set a link destination of system controller. P.5-38
BEEP MODE To set the operation buzzer. P.5-39
CUT OFF LOOP Set when using the loop cut function. P.5-39
C TIME For setting the loop cut time. P.5-40
SIL-20A/20AC 5-17
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Changer Settings Group

DISP RACK STATUS Displays the status of racks 1 to 12 in the Rack Changer II. P.5-43
STACK A CODE Enter the stack code of stack A. P.5-43
STACK B CODE Enter the stack code of stack B. P.5-44
STACK C CODE Enter the stack code of stack C. P.5-44
STACK D CODE Enter the stack code of stack D. P.5-44
STACK A STRK Set the needle stroke for stack A. P.5-45
STACK B STRK Set the needle stroke for stack B. P.5-45
STACK C STRK Set the needle stroke for stack C. P.5-46
STACK D STRK Set the needle stroke for stack D. P.5-46
REMOVE RACK Set when removing the rack-changer rack from the instrument. P.5-47
LED LIGHT Turn on the LED inside the Rack Changer II for about 10 seconds. P.5-50
AUTO EXCHANGE Changes the rack to the next one during sample analysis of the last well. P.5-47
Set whether or not to remove the rack-changer rack from the instrument
REMOVE DUMMY P.5-48
during the time other than analysis.
Set whether or not to check the presence or absence of racks when

RC STACK SCAN P.5-49
inserting a stack.
Deletes the rack presence/absence information as well as dummy rack

Clear RACK INFO P.5-50
position.
RC INITIALIZE Checks the presence or absence of racks at all the stacks. P.5-50
5.2.2 Showing the Auxiliary Function Screens
1 Press CE .
Initial screen appears.
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
2 Press
 Press
.
to return the previous screen.
READY
3 After selecting the desired parameter, follow the

direction of each parameter described in the next PARAMETER
section. Enter to Select
4 To make more setting, press or

repeatedly to select the desired parameter.
5-18 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.2.3 Parameter Settings Group
This group is for setting and selecting the autosampler's

parameters.
PARAMETER
Enter to Select
 [COOLER TEMP]
Sets the temperature when using a sample cooler.
The current cooler temperature is displayed on the
second line. COOLER TEMP 15
NOTE
ACTUAL TEMP 15
5
This setting is possible only with C models.
The Rack Changer II (if used) is also set to the same
temperature.
Enter the temperature using the numeric keypad and

press . By entering [-1], operation of the sample
cooler is stopped.
Set Range Default value
4-40 C 15 C
 [PURGE TIME]
Sets the time for which the flow lines are purged.
Enter purge time using the numeric keypad, and press
. PURGE TIME 25.0
Input 0.1 - 25.0
0.1-25.0 min 25.0 min
SIL-20A/20AC 5-19
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [RINSE MODE]
Selects the rinsing method used for the needle during
sample injection.
Enter the rinse mode number with the numeric keypad RINSE MODE 0
and press . Input 0-3
Set value Function
0 No rinsing.
1 Rinse before aspiration of sample.
2 Rinse after aspiration of sample.
Rinse before and after aspiration of sample

3
(default).
NOTE
When performing rinsing ([RINSE MODE] set to > 0), the

[RINSE VOL] (rinse volume) setting must also be
changed, to a value greater than 450 µL. This will ensure
that the rinsing port solvent is replaced by a sufficient
volume of clean solvent.
"[RINSE VOLUME]" P. 5-21
 [RINSE DIPTIME]
Sets the length of time to dip the needle into the rinsing
port during needle rinse.
Enter the desired time with the numeric keypad and RINSE DIPTIME 0
press . Input 0-60
0-60 sec 0 sec
NOTE
When the value is set to 0 sec., the needle is lifted

immediately after it is dipped in the rinsing port.
5-20 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [RINSE VOLUME]
Sets the volume of rinse solution that is used for
replacement of the rinse solution in the rinsing port.
Enter the rinse volume with the numeric keypad and RINSE VOL 200
press . Input 0-2000
0-2000 µL 200 µL
NOTE
If the rinse volume is set to [0], analysis can be

performed with a period shorter than the standard period
by omitting the purge operation for the measurement
5
flow lines after sample injection.
" 7. Purge of measurement flow line (rinse solution
aspiration)" P. 1-6 and " 8. Purge of measurement
flow line (rinse solution discharge)" P. 1-7 in "1.3
Sample Injection" P. 1-3.
NOTE
When performing rinsing ([RINSE MODE] set to > 0), the

[RINSE VOL] (rinse volume) setting must also be
changed, to a value greater than 450 µL. This will ensure
that the rinsing port solvent is replaced by a sufficient
volume of clean solvent.
"[RINSE MODE]" P. 5-20
 [RINSE SPEED]
Sets the discharge rate of the rinse solution during
rinsing in µL/sec.
RINSE SPEED 35
NOTE Input 1-35
Set a small value when using a rinse solution with a high
viscosity that is likely to cause bubbles during pumping.
Enter the value with numeric keypad and .
1-35 µL/sec 35 µL/sec
SIL-20A/20AC 5-21
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [SAMPLE SPEED]
Sets the rate at which the sample is aspirated by the
needle in µL/sec.
Enter the value with numeric keypad and . SAMPLE SPEED15.0
Input 0.1-15.0
0.1-15 µL/sec
(Increment:
15.0 µL/sec
0.1 µL/sec, for rates <1.0 µL/sec, and
1.0 µL/sec, for rates > 1.0 µL/sec)
NOTE
15.0 L/sec is set for the default value as a general

guide.
For a viscous sample, set a smaller value.
CAUTION
When using the 50 L sample loop ASSY, set
[SAMPLE SPEED] to 5 L/sec or less.
If the speed is fast, the injection volume may not be
precise or may be reproducible.
 [NEEDLE STROKE]
Sets the distance that the needle descends into the vial.
When the rack is changed, this parameter is
automatically reset to the default value (the needle goes NEEDLE STROKE 52
to the depth of 2 mm from the bottom of the vial). This Input 17-54
parameter needs to be adjusted for each of the different
rack types.
Enter the value with numeric keypad and .
The setting ranges for different types of rack are shown
in the following table.
Set Default value

Rack type
Range (Increment: mm)
1-mL vial rack 17-54 51
1.5-mL vial rack 17-54 52
1.5-mL vial cooling rack 17-54 52
4-mL vial rack 17-54 51
Microtiter plate rack 10-52 45
Deep-well plate rack 10-52 40
5-22 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
NOTE
For rack-changer racks, set the needle stroke in the

changer settings group.
"[STACK A STRK]" P. 5-45
"[STACK B STRK]" P. 5-45
"[STACK C STRK]" P. 5-46
"[STACK D STRK]" P. 5-46
CAUTION
When using one of the following vials or another thin-tipped small-capacity vial, set the needle stroke to
50 mm or less.
If a value greater than 50 mm is set for these vials, the tip of the needle may touch the vial bottom since it
is higher than other glass vials. This may result in varied aspiration amounts or damage to the needle tip.
Part Part No. 5

1.1-mL vial S228-21283-91
1-mL vial S228-31600-91
0.3-mL vial S228-16847-92
0.2-mL vial S228-35217-91
"Sample Racks" P. 1-15
NOTE
The needle stroke must be set so that there will be at least 1 mm left between the needle tip and the bottom of
the vial or well. If there is no space between the needle tip and the bottom of the vial or well, the needle tip will
contact the vial or well and may fail in sample aspiration, resulting in false analysis results.
In addition, even if the same kinds of microtiter plates or deep-well plates are used with the same needle
stroke setting, the distance between the needle tip and the well bottom may vary 3 mm maximum due to the
rack structure depending on whether the autosampler is used independently or is used in combination with a
Rack Changer II.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-23
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
[When the autosampler is used independently (microtiter plate rack or deep-well plate rack)]
When the well bottom thickness at the microtiter plate is 1 mm and the needle stroke setting is 45 mm (default),
the needle tip will move down to the depth 6 mm from the well bottom surface ( as shown in "Fig. 5.1").
With default needle stroke setting

Needle
(in its home position)
Well bottom
Needle stroke setting
(= descending distance of the needle): 45 mm
Microtiter plate or Gap between the needle tip
deep-well plate and the well bottom: 6 mm
Well bottom thickness: 1 mm

Microtiter plate or
deep-well plate rack Rack bottom thickness: 5 mm
Fig. 5.1
[When the autosampler is used with Rack Changer II (rack-changer rack)]

When the well bottom thickness at the microtiter plate is 1 mm and the needle stroke setting is 45 mm
(default), the needle tip will move down to the depth 3 mm from the well bottom surface ( as shown in
"Fig. 5.2").
With default needle stroke setting

Needle
(in its home position)
Well bottom Needle stroke setting

(= descending distance of the needle): 45 mm
Gap between the needle tip
Microtiter plate or and the well bottom: 3 mm
deep-well plate
Well bottom thickness: 1 mm
Rack Rack bottom thickness: 6 mm
Rack-changer rack thickness:
Rack-changer rack 2 mm
Fig. 5.2
5-24 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
NOTE
The needle stroke setting range and default value for each plate type for the Rack Changer II is given below.
Needle stroke setting Needle stroke default

Stack code Plate type
range (mm) value (mm)
0 96-well microtiter plate 10-52 45
1 96-well deep-well plate 10-52 45
2 1.5-mL vial plate*1 10-46 44
3 384-well microtiter plate*1 10-52 45
4 384-well deep-well plate*1 10-52 45

*1
When using these plates, be sure to use the "Enhancing Kit for Rack Changer II Plates (Part No.: S228-50829-92)".
"[STACK A STRK]" P. 5-45

"[STACK B STRK]" P. 5-45
"[STACK C STRK]" P. 5-46
5
"[STACK D STRK]" P. 5-46
CAUTION
When using plastic vials or small-capacity vials with narrow tips, set "42" (mm) or less for the needle
stroke.
If a value greater than "42" (mm) is set, since the bottom position of these vials is higher than that of glass
vials, there may be cases where the needle hits the bottom, resulting in variations in the amount of sample
injection or breakage of the needle tip.
Part name Part No.
1.1-mL vial S228-21283-91
1-mL vial S228-31600-91
0.2-mL vial S228-35217-91
SIL-20A/20AC 5-25
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Amount of liquid left in the bottom 2 mm of the vials

Part name Capacity Part No. Amount of liquid 2 mm left at the vial bottom
1-mL vial 1 mL S228-39699-91 Approx. 65 µL
1.5-mL vial 1.5 mL S228-15652-92 Approx. 150 µL
1.1-mL vial 1.1 mL S228-21283-91 Approx. 5 µL
0.3-mL vial 300 µL S228-16847-92 Approx. 5 µL
 [MTP WELL]
Set the well type of microtiter plates to be loaded in a
rack when microtiter plates are used. Select whether the
well type setting is to be downloaded from CBM-20A/ MTP WELL 0
20Alite or to be set on the instrument. Enter the set value 0:REMOTE 1:LOCAL
using the numeric keypad and press .
Set value Function
Download the selection between 96 wells and

0
384 wells from the CBM-20A/20Alite.
Set up the selection between 96 wells and 384

1
wells on the instrument.
When setting up the well selection, the screen at the

SET MTP WELL 1
right will be displayed. Enter the set value using the
numeric keypad and press . 0:96 1:384
Set value Function
96-well microtiter plates or deep-well plates are

0
used.
384-well microtiter plates or deep-well plates

1
are used.
NOTE
When the instrument is connected to the CBM-20A/

20Alite via RS-232C cable, well selection cannot be
made on the web controller screen. Set "1" at [MTP
WELL] and set up the well selection on the instrument.
5-26 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [MTP ORDER]
When injecting samples from a microtiter plate, set
whether priority is given to columns or rows. Enter the
column priority mode (0:A1A2) or the row priority mode MTP ORDER 0
(1:1A1B) with the numeric keypad and press . 0:A1A2 1:1A1B
Set value Type of well continuous processing direction
Column priority mode (default value).

0 Injection operation is performed in the order A1,
A2...
Row priority mode

1 Injection operation is performed in the order 1A,
1B...
Sample No. setting in the Column priority mode 5

When injecting the sample in the Column priority mode, With microtiter plate 96-well
well positions are indicated by entering alphabetical
Column letter first, followed by the Row number
(e.g.A12).
As a setting example, the setting method when a 96-well
microtiter plate is set to Rack 1 position (front of the left
rack) and the B2 to B12, C1 to C12, and D1 to D4 wells
are analyzed in the order shown in the following figure is
described.
To enter the well position "B2" in the sample table, press

ABC twice to display "B" (The character on the
screen changes as A  B  C  A every time you
press the key). Then press , and press
with the numeric keypad (The
Analysis order of the wells:
number portion should be entered with two digits. Press
B2 to B12, C1 to C12, D1 to D4
for 2, and for 12).
Fig. 5.3
SIL-20A/20AC 5-27
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Sample No. setting in the Row priority mode

When injecting the sample in the Row priority mode, well
With microtiter plate 96-well
positions are indicated by entering Row number first,
followed by the Column letter (e.g.12A).
This section describes an example of the sequence
setting method when a 96-well microtiter plate is set to
Rack 1 position (front of the left rack) and 2B to 2H, 3A to
3H, 4A to 4D wells are going to be analyzed in the order
shown in the following figure.
To enter the well position "2B" in the sample table, press

with the numeric keypad
(The number portion should be entered with two digits.
Press for 2, and
for 12). Then, press ABC twice to display "B" (The
character on the screen changes as A  B  C  A
Analysis order of the wells:
every time you press the key), and press .
2B to 2H, 3A to 3H, 4A to 4D
Fig. 5.4
5-28 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [EVENT]
Sets the contact output for external output terminals. It is
used, for example, to switch flow-line switching valves.
Set the connector number for which the contacts close. EVENT 0
Input 0 - 123
Set value Function
0 All terminals are opened.
1 Connector 1's terminals are closed.
12 Connector 1, 2's terminals are closed.
13 Connector 1, 3's terminals are closed.
23
123
Connector 2, 3's terminals are closed.
Connector 1, 2, 3's terminals are closed. 5

NOTE
When using terminals of connector 1 for the EVENT

function, select [EVENT] for [SELECT EVENT 1]. This is
the case with terminals of connectors 2 and 3.
No value can be set for terminals if [EVENT] is not
selected.
"[SELECT EVENT1]" P. 5-36
 [Repeat Inj Table]

Sets whether or not [Repeat injection] is used.
[Repeat injection] consists of repeatedly executing a
repeat injection table at specified line intervals in the RepeatInjTable 0
analysis sequence table. 0:Off 1:On
Enter the set value by the numeric keypad, and press
.
Set value Function
0 Not used (default value).
1 Used.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-29
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.2.4 Control Settings Group

This is the group for system control.
CONTROL
Enter to Select
 [Clear SMPTBL]
Clears the analysis sequence table.
1 From the control setting screen, press

The [Clear SMPTBL] screen will be displayed.
.
Clear SMPTBL 0
0:No 1:Yes
2 Enter the set value by the numeric keypad and
press .
Set value Function
0 Not cleared the analysis sequence table.
1 Cleared the analysis sequence table.
 [Clear RepInjtbl]
Clears the repeat injection table.

and press repeatedly until the [Clear
,
RepInjtbl] screen is displayed. Clear RepInjtbl0

0:No 1:Yes
2 Enter the set value by the numeric keypad and

press .
Set value Function
0 Not cleared the repeat injection table.
1 Cleared the repeat injection table.
5-30 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [STAT]
Interrupts analysis based on a sample table to perform
immediate analysis for one sample.
NOTE
• Once a priority analysis has been started, it cannot be

canceled.
• When a system controller is connected, this setting is
not possible.
1 Press
press
in the control setting screen and
repeatedly until the [STAT] screen
appears. STAT
Enter to Edit
2 Enter the vial number by the numeric keypad and

. 5
3 Enter the injection volume by the numeric keypad

and press . ST 1 1 1
10.0 10.00
4 Enter the analysis time by the numeric keypad and
press .
The next screen specifies how operation is to
proceed after the priority analysis ends. Auto Restart 0
0:No 1:Yes
NOTE
To stop priority analysis, press the CE to return to

the control setting screen.
5 Enter the setting determining the operation after

completion of interruption analysis, and press
.
Set value Function
Analysis sequence pauses when priority

0
analysis ends.
Analysis sequence resumes when priority

1
analysis ends.
6 The priority analysis will begin as soon as the

current sample of the analysis sequence table is
analyzed.
The [STAT] LED is illuminated when analysis is
being interrupted.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-31
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [PAUSE]
Stops analysis temporarily.

and press
,
repeatedly until the [PAUSE]
screen is displayed. PAUSE 0
0:NO 1:YES
2 Enter the set value by the numeric keypad, and

press .
If [1] is selected, execution is stopped after
completion of the analysis currently being
executed. The [start] LED is illuminated when [1]
is selected.
Set value Function
0 Analysis is not paused.
1 Analysis is paused.
3 Press start to restart analysis.
 [MANUAL PURGE]
Draws in the rinse solution using the manual syringe.
Use the following procedure to perform manual purging.
Set value Function
0 Stops purging in the manual syringe.
1 Starts purging in the manual syringe.
NOTE
This screen is also displayed when is pressed

on the initial screen. MANUAL PURGE 0
0:Off 1:On
1 Insert the manual syringe in the tubing projecting
from port 3 of the low-pressure valve.
2 Enter the set value [1] and press .
3 Draw in rinse solution with the manual syringe

until the rinse solution come into manual syringe.
4 Enter the set value [0] and press

Manual purge stops.
.
5-32 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [Z HOME]
Used when the instrument is not to be used for a long
time or before moving the instrument.
Press to move the needle. ZHOME
The needle is raised to the highest point and moved to Enter to Start
the center of the equipment.
NOTE
• Press again to return the needle to the

injection port.
• Pressing directly moves from the initial
screen to the (Z HOME) screen.
 [TEST INJ PORT]

Checks that the needle is lowered correctly into the
5
injection port.
1 Stop the pump.
TEST INJ PORT

Enter to Test
2 Press .
The tip of the needle moves up and down
approximately 2 mm at the position where the
injection port is closed. Check that the needle is
lowered into the injection port without swaying.
NOTE
Make fine adjustments if the position is incorrect.

"[ADJUST INJ PORT]" P. 5-86
 [PURGE (Ext Pump)]

Used to draw in rinse solution with the rinsing pump
(optional) and rinse the outside of the needle.
Press to purge. PURGE (Ext Pump)
The following operations are executed. Enter to Start
1) The rinsing pump operates for approximately 10 s, and
rinse solution is pumped to the rinsing port.
2) The needle moves to the rinsing port.
3) Rinse solution is pumped by the rinsing pump, and the
outside of the needle is rinsed for approximately 10 s.
4) The needle returns to the injection port.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-33
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [HPV TEST]
Check the high pressure valve.
After rotating the high pressure valve, output the start
signal to the event terminal. HPV TEST
Check the high pressure valve to use this function, if the Enter to Start
ghost peak will appear or the carry over will occur.
When you will change or clean the high pressure valve;
"8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-Pressure
Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY" P. 8-21.
5.2.5 System Settings Group
This is the group for system settings.
SYSTEM
Enter to Select
 [LOCAL]
Sets whether this instrument is operated by system
controller or the instrument operates independently
when system controller is connected. LOCAL 0
Enter the desired value, and press . 0:Remote 1:Local
After setting, turn off the power and then turn it on again.
Set
Mode Function
value
Operate via system controller

0 Remote
(initial setting).
1 Local Operate independently (in local mode).
 [KEY CLOSE]
Press to prohibit key entry.
After this, key operation is not available.
KEY CLOSE
NOTE Enter to Close
To release this function, press shift while pressing
.
5-34 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [BRIGHTNESS]
Sets the brightness of display screen.
Enter the set value and press .
Value range is 1 to 4 and 4 is the brightest. BRIGHTNESS 3
Input 1-4
 [CNT RACK STRK]

Sets the distance that the needle is lowered to the
control vial rack.
Enter the stroke value with the numeric keypad, and CNT RACK STRK 52
5
press . Input 17 - 54
Set range Default value
17-54 52
 [MAX Inj. Volume]

Sets the maximum injection volume. When creating a
sample table, specify a value smaller than value for the
injection volume. MAX Inj. Volume
Enter the maximum injection volume using the numeric 50-2000 100uL
keypad and press .
100 L
When optional sample loop ASSY 500 L
50 to 2000 L or 2 mL is used, enter 500 L or 2000 L.
When sample loop ASSY 50 L is used,
enter 50 L.
NOTE
When using the CBM-20A/20Alite system controller or

LCsolution workstation, the maximum injection volume
can be displayed but not changed.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-35
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [SELECT EVENT1]
Selects the output of No. 1 external output terminals.
This is used, for example, to switch flow-line valves.
Enter the set value using the numeric keypad and press SELECT EVENT1 0
. 0:Ev 1:St
Set value Function
0 Used as event output (default setting).
Short-circuit output for one second at the start of

1
analysis
 [SELECT EVENT2]
Selects the output of No. 2 external output terminals.
This is used, for example, to switch flow-line valves.
Enter the set value using the numeric keypad and press SELECT EVENT2 0
. 0:Ev 1:St 2:Sd
Set value Function
0 Used as event output (default setting).
1 Contacts close at the start of analysis.
Contacts close on completion of all lines in the

2
sample table.
NOTE
The set value "2" is valid only when the instrument is

used on a standalone basis without connecting the
system controller.
 [SELECT EVENT3]
Selects the output of No.3 external output terminals. This
is used, for example, to switch external valves.
Enter the set value by the numeric keypad and press SELECT EVENT3 0
. 0:Error 1:Event
Set value Function
Contacts close when an error occurs (default

0
setting).
1 Used as event output.
5-36 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [RINSE METHOD]
Sets the needle rinsing method when using the optional
rinsing pump.
Enter the set value by the numeric keypad and press
.
RINSE METHOD 0
Input 0-6
Set value Function
0 Not used (default setting).
The needle is only pump-rinsed using with the

1
rinsing pump.
The needle is rinsed using both the standard

rinsing port and the rinsing pump. (After the
2
needle is pump-rinsed using the rinsing pump, it
is dip-rinsed at the rinsing port.)
The needle is rinsed using both the standard

rinsing port and the rinsing pump. (After the
5
3
needle is dip-rinsed at the rinsing port, it is
pump-rinsed with the rinsing pump.)
When performing sample injection, the needle is

dip-rinsed at the standard rinsing port, following
the setting of [RINSE MODE], and when the
analysis time ends, it is pump-rinsed with the
rinsing pump.
(Example)
When [RINSE MODE] = 3
and [RINSE METHOD] = 4
the rinsing behavior is as follows:
4
1) When performing sample injection, the
needle is dip-rinsed at the standard rinsing
port before and after measuring the sample.
2) Injects the sample and starts the analysis.
3) The analysis time elapses.
4) The needle is pump-rinsed with the rinsing
pump.
5) When there is more to be analyzed, the
above steps 1) through 4) are repeated.
5 Reserved for expansion (cannot be used)
6 Reserved for expansion (cannot be used)
SIL-20A/20AC 5-37
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [EXT RINSE TIME]

Sets the rinse time for the optional rinsing pump.
Enter the rinse time by the numeric keypad and press
. EXT RINSE TIME 2
Input 1-9
1-9 sec 2 sec
NOTE
Approximately 1.5 mL of rinse solution is used in 1 sec.
 [SMALL ID VIAL]
When samples vials with a small capacity are used,
atmospheric changes in the vials during sample
measurement can cause incorrect measurements. This SMALL ID VIAL 0
function can be used to reduce the influence of these 0:Off 1:On
changes in atmospheric pressure.
Select [1:On] when using small-capacity vials.
Set value Function
Small-capacity vials are not used (default

0
setting).
1 Small-capacity vials are used.
NOTE
If the needle is clogged with a microtiter plate mat in use,

select [1: On]. The clogging may be reduced.
 [CBM LINK]
Sets the link destination of system controller.
Enter the desired value, and press .
After setting, turn off the power and then turn it on again. CBM LINK 1
0:Int 1:Ext
Set value Function
Link with CBM-20Alite (option) inside of the

0
instrument.
Link with external system controller by optical

1
cable connected to [REMOTE] connector.
5-38 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [BEEP MODE]
Sets operation of buzzer.
Enter a set value and press .
BEEP MODE 0
0:On 1:Alm 2:Off
Set value Function
Alarm sound when error occurs and key entry

sound (and rack changer operation sound if
0
Rack Changer II is provided) are enabled.
(default setting)
Only alarm sound when error occurs is

enabled. Key entry sound (and rack changer
1
operation sound if Rack Changer II is provided)
is disabled.
2 All sounds are disabled.
5
 [CUT OFF LOOP]
When analysis is started after the sample injection, the
high-pressure valve typically remains in the injection
position until the analysis is complete. However, when CUT OFF LOOP 0
this function is enabled, the high-pressure valve is 0:Off 1:On
switched to the load position for a specified period of
analysis time.
NOTE
This function can only be accessed through the Sample loop

autosampler menu and cannot be accessed through the
system controller.
NOTE
Solvent delivery
2 1 module
Set the high-pressure valve switching time for [C TIME].
"[C TIME]" P. 5-40 3 6
4 5
High-pressure Column
valve (Inject)
Fig. 5.5
SIL-20A/20AC 5-39
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
NOTE
After a gradient analysis, the mobile phase composition Sample loop

must return to the initial concentration before starting the
next analysis. At the autosampler, the mobile phase
must be purged from the flow lines that extend from the
sample loop to the injection port. Purging at a low flow
Solvent delivery
rates takes some time. This function enables gradient 2 1 module
analysis in a shorter flow line from the sample loop to the
injection port and shortens the time required to purge the 3 6
mobile phase. 4 5
High-pressure Column
valve (Load)
Fig. 5.6
Set value Function
Disables the CUT OFF LOOP function (default

0
setting).
1 Enables the CUT OFF LOOP function.
 [C TIME]
This item is enabled when [CUT OFF LOOP] is set to 1
(On).
Set the time for the high-pressure valve to switch to the C TIME 1/ 0.1
load position after analysis starts and the time for it to 1-999/0.1-999.9
return to the injection position. Refer to the example on
the next page.
NOTE
Set the time for the high-pressure valve to switch to the

load position in seconds. Set the time for the valve to
return to the injection position in minutes. When the high-
pressure valve has been returned to the injection
position, the purge operation with rinse solution is
initiated, and on completion of the purge operation, the
next analysis is started.
Set value Function
Set the time of switching to the load

0-999 sec
position.
Set the time of switching to the injection

0.1-999.9 min
position.
5-40 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
[CUT OFF LOOP] setting example:

Use the following example sequence to set the valve switching times. First the valve is in the injection
position, then the rinse solution purge operation starts, and finally analysis finish time is reached. In other
words, "4 Analysis time" on the sample table must be longer than "2 Injection position time" + "3 Rinse
solution purge operation".
Setting
1 Load position time Set value: 90 sec
2 Injection position time Set value: 2.0 min

4
3 Rinse solution purge operation
Analysis time 4.0 min
Injection timing (0 sec)

5
Flow of analysis
1 Load position switching time (90 sec)

The rinse solution purge
2 Injection position switching time (120 sec) time varies depending on
the setting for rinse volume.
3 Rinse solution purge operation after sample Calculate an approximate
injection purge time from the rinse
speed and the rinse
volume.
4 Analysis finish set time (240 sec)
SIL-20A/20AC 5-41
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Improper [CUT OFF LOOP] setting example:

If the analysis time is shorter than the valve switching time on the sample table as shown below, the analysis
will be complete when "2 Injection position time" + "3 Rinse solution purge operation" are finished.
CAUTION
If the actual analysis time is longer than the one set in the sample table, an ERROR may be generated.
Ensure that the analysis time setting and the valve switching time setting for [CUT OFF LOOP] are made
correctly.
Setting
1 Load position time Set value: 90 sec
2 Injection position time Set value: 2.0 min
3 Analysis time 0.5 min
Injection timing (0 sec) Short analysis time
3 Analysis finish set time (30 sec)

Flow of analysis
Analysis is not finished here.
1 Load position switching time (90 sec)
2 Injection position switching time (120 sec)
Rinse solution purge operation after sample

injection
Analysis is finished at the same time with rinse

solution purge operation.
5-42 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.2.6 Changer Settings Group
Displayed when using an optional Rack Changer II.
NOTE
RACK CHANGER
Enter to Select
When using the following plates with "1" (384-well
microtiter plates, 384-well deep-well plates, or 1.5-mL
vial plates), be sure to use the "Enhancing Kit for Rack
Changer II Plates (Part No.: S228-50829-92)".
 [DISP RACK STATUS]

1 From the changer setting screen, press .
The [DISP RACK STATUS] screen is displayed.
DISP RACK STATUS 5
Enter to Display
2 Press
12 in order.
to display the status of racks 1 to
RACK 1 MTP-96
The rack number and type are displayed on the READY
first line and the rack status is displayed on the
second line.
 [STACK A CODE]
.
STACK A CODE 0
Set value Function Input 0 - 4
0 96-well microtiter plate is used.
1 96 deep-well plate is used.
2 1.5-mL vial plate is used (option, 1).
3 384-well microtiter plate is used (option, 1).
4 384-well deep-well plate is used (option, 1).
SIL-20A/20AC 5-43
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [STACK B CODE]
.
STACK B CODE 0
Set value Function Input 0 - 4
 [STACK C CODE]
.
STACK C CODE 0
Input 0 - 4
Set value Function
 [STACK D CODE]
.
STACK D CODE 0
Input 0 - 4
Set value Function
5-44 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [STACK A STRK]
Set the distance of moving down the needle for stack A.
Depending on the stack code used, the default value and
setting range differ. Enter the stroke value by the STACK A STRK 45
numeric keypad and press . The default value Input 10 - 52
and setting range for each stack code is given in the
table below.
Stack code set Default value

Function Set range
value (Units: mm)
0 96-well microtiter plate is used. 10-52 45
1 96-well deep-well plate is used. 10-52 45
2 1.5-mL vial plate is used (option, 1). 10-46 44
4
384-well microtiter plate is used (option, 1).
384-well deep-well plate is used (option, 1).

10-52
10-52
45
45
5
"[When the autosampler is used with Rack Changer II (rack-changer rack)]" P. 5-24
 [STACK B STRK]
Set the distance of moving down the needle for stack B.
setting range differ. Enter the stroke value by the STACK B STRK 45
table below.

Function Set range
value (Units: mm)
3 384-well microtiter plate is used (option, 1). 10-52 45
4 384-well deep-well plate is used (option, 1). 10-52 45
SIL-20A/20AC 5-45
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [STACK C STRK]
Set the distance of moving down the needle for stack C.
setting range differ. Enter the stroke value by the STACK C STRK 45
table below.

Function Set range
value (Units: mm)
 [STACK D STRK]
Set the distance of moving down the needle for stack D.
setting range differ. Enter the stroke value by the STACK D STRK 45
table below.

Function Set range
value (Units: mm)
5-46 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [REMOVE RACK]
.
REMOVE RACK
0:Rack 1:Dummy
Set value Function
When using the A models, if there is a rack

0 remaining inside the autosampler, it is returned
to the Rack Changer II.
When using the C models, the rack-changer

rack is removed from the autosampler. If there is
1
a sample cooler, the rack changer II's dummy
rack is returned to a neutral position.
NOTE
This screen is also displayed when

on the initial screen.
is pressed 5
 [AUTO EXCHANGE]
The rack set in the instrument will be changed to the next
one after sample injection into the last well indicated in
the table at the lower right. AUTO EXCHANGE 0
0:Off 1:On
.
Set value Function
The next rack is not set when sample injection

Rack Type Last Well
0 to the last well has been completed (default
setting). 96-well microtiter plate H12
The next rack is set when sample injection to 96-well deep-well plate H12
1
the last well has been completed.
1.5-mL vial plate (option, 1) 54
384-well microtiter plate (option, 1) P24
384-well deep-well plate (option, 1) P24
SIL-20A/20AC 5-47
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
NOTE
• This function is also valid if it is operated on the

workstation.
• The rack change order is limited to this pattern: 1  2
 3 ... 10  11  12  1  2  3 ...
When using this function, the rack number must be
specified in consecutive number.
• When the instrument is used independently or is
controlled from the CBM-20A or CBM-20Alite, set "0".
If you set "1", analysis may take a longer time.
• When using this function, the number of injection times
of the last well must be "1". If you set "2" or greater, the
rack will be changed each time the last well has been
analyzed, which will extend the rack change time.
 [REMOVE DUMMY]
On completion of analysis the dummy rack is
automatically moved to the neutral position. This is used
when removing the rack-changer rack after analysis. REMOVE DUMMY 0
0:MANUAL 1:AUTO
.
Set value Function

0 not moved to the neutral position (default
setting).

1
moved to the neutral position.
NOTE
When "1" is set on the model equipped with a sample

cooler, the sample cooler is automatically turned OFF
before moving the dummy rack to the neutral position.
(The sample cooler at the Rack Changer II remains ON.)
It is automatically turned ON when the rack-changer rack
is removed and another rack (rack-changer racks or
other racks) is installed.
5-48 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [RC STACK SCAN]

Determine whether or not to perform rack check
operation when the stack has been installed.
RC STACK SCAN 0
Enter the set value by the numeric keypad and press 0:AUTO 1:USER
.
Set value Function
Rack check operation is automatically

0 performed when the stack has been installed
(default setting).
Rack check operation is not performed when the

1
stack has been installed.
NOTE
5
• When "1" is selected, press within
10 seconds while the screen at the right is displayed
after the stack has been installed, to perform rack Enter to Init A
check operation at the stack. Left 10 sec
• The screen at the right is displayed during the rack

check operation. RACK CHANGER
DETECTING RACK
• When "1" is selected, if you remove the rack from the
stack and attempt to start analysis with its rack number
specified, a rack set warning will occur and stop
analysis.
Within 1 minute after the warning has occurred, set a
rack to the rack number position specified for analysis.
If you do not set it within 1 minute, a no-rack error will
occur and stop analysis.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-49
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [Clear RACK INFO]

The Rack Changer II keeps the information of rack
presence or absence at each stack.
Use this function to delete the rack information. Clear RACK INFO
Enter to Clear
Press , and the rack information will be deleted

and the screen at the right will be displayed. Turn the Cleared
Rack Changer II power OFF and ON. Reboot Changer
"4.5 Turning ON the Power" in the Rack
Changer II Instruction Manual
NOTE
When the rack information has been deleted, turn the

Rack Changer II power OFF and ON, or perform
initialization (rack check operation for all stacks) from the
RC INITIALIZE menu.
"[RC INITIALIZE]" P. 5-50
 [RC INITIALIZE]
Rack check operation is performed for all stacks.
Press , and the Rack Changer II will perform RC INITIALIZE

rack check operation for all stacks and update the Enter to Start
display on the Rack Changer II to the current state.
The screen at the right is displayed during the rack check

operation. RACK CHANGER
INITIALIZING
 [LED LIGHT]
Press to turn on the LED inside the Rack
Changer II for about 10 seconds.
LED LIGHT
NOTE Enter to Light
This is enabled only when the Rack Changer II with LED
illumination is used.
5-50 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.3 Using a Rack Changer II
5.3 Using a Rack Changer II

By using the Rack Changer II, analysis is possible from up to 12 microtiter plates, deep-well plates or 1.5-mL
vial plates. Use the Rack Changer II according to the procedure described below.
NOTE
When using 384-well microtiter plates, 384-well deep-well plates, or 1.5-mL vial plates with the Rack
Changer II, be sure to use the "Enhancing Kit for Rack Changer II Plates (Part No.: S228-50829-92)".
( Refer to the Rack Changer II Instruction Manual.)
1 Set the rack-changer rack in the autosampler.

Verify the communication between the
autosampler and the Rack Changer II.
• The screen shown on the right is displayed.
• The [READY] lamp is illuminated at the Rack
L:Changer/R:CntR
CNG-LINK READY 5
Changer II.
2 Set the plates in the Rack Changer II.
Adapter number
Adapter number (The lamp is illuminated when the adapter is set.)
Stack number
(rack number input in the sample table)
Stack A 1, 2, and 3 from the stack front side
Stack B 4, 5, and 6 from the stack front side

Stack D
Stack C 7, 8, and 9 from the stack front side
Stack D 10, 11, and 12 from the stack front side Stack C
NOTE
Stack B
When performing injection from a control vial rack, set [0]

as the rack number in the sample table. Stack A
Fig. 5.7
NOTE
When using an autosampler with a Rack Changer II, analysis is possible using racks other than rack-changer
racks.
Before removing the rack-changer rack from the autosampler, check that there is no rack on the rack-changer
rack. If a rack remains on the rack-changer rack, return the rack to the Rack Changer II.
"[REMOVE RACK]" P. 5-47
SIL-20A/20AC 5-51
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.4 Setting Bracket Sequence Analysis

When a specific number of samples is to be injected, this mode can be used to inject samples repeatedly, at
periodic intervals. In this mode, a special repeat injection table (in additional to the standard injection mode
analysis sequence table) is created.
An example of a repeat injection table is provided below.
Analysis based on the following sample injection table and repeat injection table (interval = 4) is performed in
the way described below.
Sample injection table
line rack from to rep inj vol runtime
0 1 0 9 10 10 10
1 1 20 30 10 10 30
Repeat injection table
2 1 30 39 1 10 30
line rack from to rep inj vol runtime
3 1 50 59 10 10 30
0 1 80 80 1 100 30
4 1 60 60 1 200 30
1 1 81 81 5 100 30
5 1 70 79 1 100 30
2 1 82 82 1 100 30
6 1 71 71 1 100 30
7 1 72 72 1 100 30
Interval = 4
8 1 73 73 1 100 30
NOTE
This is not usable when the system controller CBM-20A/20Alite or SCL-10Avp is connected.
1 First, the repeat injection table (lines 0 through 2) is executed.
2 Next, lines 0 through 3 of the analysis sequence table are executed.

(Since the Interval is 4, the repeat injection table is executed every fourth line of the analysis sequence
table.)
3 The repeat injection table (lines 0 through 2) is executed again.
4 Lines 4 through 7 of the analysis sequence table are executed.
5 The repeat injection table (lines 0 through 2) is executed once more.
5-52 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6 Line 8 of the analysis sequence table is executed. All the analyses have now been completed.
Use the following procedure to create a sample table and repeat injection table for this type of analysis.
5.4.1 Creating a Repeat Injection Table

 Displaying the Setting Screen
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
2 Press
screen.
to display the parameter setting
5
3 From the parameter setting screen, press
, and press repeatedly until the RepeatInjTable 1
[RepeatInjTable] screen is displayed. 0:OFF 1:ON
4 Enter and press .
5 Press
screen.
CE two times to return to the initial
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
6 Press .
The screen on the right will be briefly displayed, to
Editing Repeat
be replaced by the parameter setting screen. Injection Table
 Setting Repeat Injection Table
1 Use numeric keypad to enter the rack number,

and press .The cursor will move to the
[from] field. 0 1 ™ 1 1 1
10 10.00
SIL-20A/20AC 5-53
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2 Use numeric keypad to enter the number of the

first vial to be injected, and press .The
cursor will move to the [to] field. 0 1 70 ™70 1
10 10.00
3 Enter the number of the last vial to be injected,

[rep] field. 0 1 70 70 ™1
10 10.00
4 Enter the number of injections to be made from

each vial, and press . The cursor will
move to the [inj volume] field on the second line. 0 1
70 70 1
™ 10 10.00
NOTE
The maximum setting for the number of injections is 30.
5 Enter the injection volume by the numeric keypad,

in µL and press .The cursor will move to
the [runtime] field. 0 1 70 70 1
100 ™0.00
NOTE

in 1 L increments. When injecting 101 L or greater, an
optional sample loop ASSY500 L is required. When
injecting 501 L or greater, an optional sample loop
ASSY 2 mL is required. Set a value smaller than the
6 Enter the analysis time, in minutes, and press

.
0 1 70 70 1
NOTE 100 30.00
increments.
5-54 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7 Press .
The screen for setting the next line appears.
0 ™1
8 Repeat steps 1 to 7 and set the next line.
NOTE
• Up to 10 lines can be set in the repeat injection table.

9 Press CE
completed.
when the table settings have been
 Setting Interval Conditions

5
1 Press .
The [Interval] screen is displayed.
Interval 4™
Input 1-99
2 Using the numeric keypad, set the interval
between insertions in terms of the number of lines
in the analysis sequence created with the sample
table. In this case, enter . The setting
range is from 1 to 99 lines.
3 Press .
The input value is validated.
 Setting Sample Table

1 The sample table screen will be briefly displayed,
and then replaced by the parameter setting
screen. Editing
Sample Table
2 Use the numeric keypad to enter the first rack

number, and press .The cursor will move
to the [from] field. 0 1 ™ 1 1 1
10 10.00
SIL-20A/20AC 5-55
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3 Use numeric keypad to enter the number [0] of the

first vial to be injected, and press .
The cursor will move to the [to] field. 0 1 1 ™ 1 1
10 10.00
4 Enter the number of the last vial to be injected,

[rep] field. 0 1 1 9 ™1
10 10.00
5 Enter the number of injections to be made from

each vial, and press .
The cursor will move to the [inj volume] field on the 0 11 9 10
second line. ™ 10 10.00
6 Enter the injection volume with numeric keypad, in

µL and press .The cursor will move to the
[runtime] field. 0 1 1 9 10
10 ™0.00
NOTE

in 1 µL increments. When injecting 101 L or greater, an
optional sample loop ASSY500 L is required. When
injecting 501 L or greater, an optional sample loop
ASSY 2 mL is required. Set a value smaller than the
7 Enter the analysis time, in minutes, and press

.
0 1 1 9 10
NOTE 10 10.00
increments.
5-56 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8 Press .
The next line is displayed.
1 ™1
9 Repeat steps 1 to 7 and set the next line.
NOTE
• Up to 99 lines can be set in the sample table.

(If a repeat injection table is created, up to 99 lines
including the number of repetitions can be set.)
10 Press CE to go back to the initial screen.
5
5.4.2 Creating an Analysis Sequence Table during the Analysis
When the repeat injection table is used, a repeat injection table or an analysis sequence table cannot be
changed or added during the analysis.
When the repeat injection table is not used, the parameters can be changed or added from the second line
under the current analysis. Under the pause state, the parameters can be changed or added from the next
line.
5.4.3 Analysis in Bracket Sequence Analysis Mode

The procedures for sample preparation and configuration of settings are the same as those for standard
injection mode. The procedures for performing analysis are almost the same as those for standard injection
mode.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-57
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
VP functions support the validation of the instrument by check functions or displaying the instrument
information.
There are four groups for VP functions: Product Information, Maintenance Information, Validation Support,
and Calibration Support.
5.5.1 List of VP Functions

The VP functions are listed in the tables below.
"5.1.3 VP Function Screens" P. 5-10
 Product Information Group

Command Function Page
SERIAL NUMBER Displays the instrument serial number. P.5-62
S/W ID Displays the instrument name and ROM version. P.5-62
RC SERIAL NUMBER Displays the serial number of Rack Changer II. P.5-62
RC S/W ID Displays the program version number of Rack Changer II. P.5-62
 Maintenance Information Group

TOTAL OP TIME Displays the instrument's total operating time. P.5-63
NDL SEAL USED Displays needle seal usage. P.5-63
HPV SEAL USED Displays the usage frequency of the high-pressure valve rotor. P.5-63
LPV SEAL USED Displays the usage frequency of the low-pressure valve rotor. P.5-64
EXT PUMP USED Displays rinsing pump usage. P.5-64
NDLE FLUSH Rinses needle interior (to remove clogs). P.5-64
P-SET In case of replacing measuring plunger and plunger seal. P.5-64
HPV ROTATION Used after HPV rotor replacement. P.5-65
LPV ROTATION Used after LPV rotor replacement. P.5-65
PART REPLACEMENT For entering records of parts replacement. P.5-65
MAINTENANCE LOG Displays maintenance log. P.5-66
OPERATION LOG Displays operation log. P.5-66
ERROR LOG Displays error log. P.5-67
5-58 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 Validation Support Group

DATE Displays/sets the date. P.5-68
TIME Displays/sets the time. P.5-68
MEMORY CHECK Runs memory check. P.5-69
POSITION SENS Executes self-diagnosis by position sensors. P.5-69
LEAK SENSOR TEST Runs check on leak sensor. P.5-70
 Calibration Support Group

Input PASSWORD For password input. P.5-71
ADJUST MTP For adjusting the position of microtiter plates or deep-well plates. P.5-71 5
ERASE MTP ADJ For deleting microtiter plates position data. P.5-76
ASP FACTOR For correcting the injection volume accuracy. P.5-77
LEAK THR For adjusting operation level of the leak sensor. P.5-79
NDLE SEAL For changing needle seal replacement alert value. P.5-79
HPV SEAL For changing HPV rotor replacement alert value. P.5-79
LPV SEAL For changing LPV rotor replacement alert value. P.5-79
EXT PUMP For changing rinsing pump replacement alert value. P.5-80
CANCEL DOORSW For setting automatic door open/close detection. P.5-80
CANCEL RACKDET For setting automatic rack detection. P.5-81
CANCEL VIALDET For setting automatic vial detection. P.5-82
OP MODE For setting the mode for communications with the external controller. P.5-82
INITIALIZE PARAM For initializing parameters and logs. P.5-82
PARAMETER LOCK For setting the parameter lock with password. P.5-83
CHANGE PASSWORD For changing password. P.5-84
ADJUST RACK For adjusting the rack position. P.5-85
ADJUST INJ PORT For adjusting the position of the injection port. P.5-86
ERASE RACK.P ADJ For erasing rack position data. P.5-89
ERASE INJ.P ADJ For erasing injection port position data. P.5-89
TEMP DELTA For correcting the sample cooler temperature. P.5-89
SIL-20A/20AC 5-59
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 CBM Parameter Group

SERIAL NUMBER Displays the serial number of CBM-20A. P.5-90
S/W ID Displays the program version number of CBM-20A. P.5-90
Sets the transmitting medium between CBM-20A and the data processing
INTERFACE P.5-90
unit.
ETHERNET SPEED Sets the transmitting speed of ethernet. P.5-91
Sets whether or not the DHCP function is used.

USE GATEWAY P.5-91
(If setting is unnecessary the screen is not displayed.)
Sets IP address of CBM-20A.

IP ADDRESS P.5-91
Sets subnet mask of CBM-20A.

SUBNET MASK P.5-92
Sets the default gateway address.

DEFAULT GATEWAY P.5-92
TRS MODE Sets condition by serial transmission. P.5-93
5-60 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
5.5.2 Displaying the VP Functions
1 Press CE .
The initial screen appears.
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
2 Press to select the desired Group.

PRODUCT INFO
Press func or VP
5
3 Press until the desired function appears.
To return to the previous screen, press SERIAL NUMBER
. L20164500001
4 Follow the further instructions of the selected

function.
5 To select a different VP Function Group, press

repeatedly. To select the desired
function, press or .
6 To return to the initial screen, press CE .
SIL-20A/20AC 5-61
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5.3 Product Information Group
This group provides the information about the

instrument.
PRODUCT INFO
Press func or VP
 [SERIAL NUMBER]
Shows the serial number of this instrument.
NOTE
SERIAL NUMBER
L20164500001
The serial number and software version number can only
be displayed. They cannot be changed.
 [S/W ID]
Shows the name of software (same as the model name)
and version.
S/W ID: V1.21
NOTE SIL-20A
The serial number and software version can only be
displayed. They cannot be changed.
 [RC SERIAL NUMBER]

Press again to display the Rack Changer II's
serial number.
RC SERIAL NUMBER
NOTE L20184500001
Only displayed if a Rack Changer II is connected.
The serial number and software version of Rack
Changer II can only be displayed. They cannot be
changed.
 [RC S/W ID]

Press again to display the software version of
Rack Changer II.
RC S/W ID: V1.11
NOTE RACK CHANGER
Only displayed if a Rack Changer II is connected.
The serial number and software version of Rack Changer II
can only be displayed. They cannot be changed.
5-62 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
5.5.4 Maintenance Information Group
This group provides the maintenance-related

information.
MAINTENANCE
Press func or VP
 [TOTAL OP TIME]
Shows the total operating time of the instrument.
TOTAL OP TIME
1(h)
5
 [NDL SEAL USED]

Displays the usage frequency and replacement alert
value for the needle seal.
NDL SEAL USED
NOTE 1/40000
After replacing the needle seal, reset the counter to [0]
by pressing and .
"8.2 Replacing Needle Seal" P. 8-5
 [HPV SEAL USED]

value for the high-pressure valve's rotor seal.
HPV SEAL USED
NOTE 1/100000
After replacing the rotor seal, reset the counter to [0] by
pressing and .
"8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-Pressure
Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY" P. 8-21
SIL-20A/20AC 5-63
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [LPV SEAL USED]

value for the low-pressure valve's rotor seal.
LPV SEAL USED
NOTE 1/60000
After replacing the rotor seal, reset the counter to [0] by
pressing and .
"8.5 Replacing and Inspecting Low-Pressure
Valve Rotor and Stator" P. 8-17
 [EXT PUMP USED]

Displays the rinsing pump's usage frequency and
replacement alert value.
EXT PUMP USED
NOTE 1/700000
After replacing the rinsing pump, reset the counter to [0]
by pressing and .
 [NDLE FLUSH]
The screen on the right can be used to rinse the inside of
the needle with mobile phase when it is clogged.
"8.13.1 Rinsing Needle and Sample Loop" P. 8-42 NDLE FLUSH
Enter to Start
 [P-SET]
This screen can be used to move the plunger position
when replacing the plunger seal and plunger.
"8.3 Replacing Plunger Seal" P. 8-8 P-SET
"8.4 Replacing and Inspecting Measuring Pump
Enter to P-SET
Plunger" P. 8-13
5-64 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 [HPV ROTATION]
This screen is used when replacing the high-pressure
valve‘s rotor seal. When this menu is executed, the high-
pressure valve rotates 50 times automatically. HPV ROTATION
It takes approx. 20 minutes to finish the operation. Enter to Start
1 Remove the column and, with the pump

connected to the plumbing using, for example, a
coupling, pump 2-propanol or methanol at a rate
of 2 mL/min.
2 Press .
The high-pressure valve rotates every several
HPV is rotating
Rot. Left 50
seconds 60 at a time automatically. The left
number of rotation is displayed in the second line. 5
NOTE
If the operation starts once, it cannot be canceled until

the 50 times-rotation has been carried out.
 [LPV ROTATION]
This screen is used when replacing the low-pressure
valve‘s rotor seal. When this menu is executed, the low-
pressure valve rotates 50 times automatically. LPV ROTATION
It takes approx. 20 minutes to finish the operation. Enter to Start
Press to make the low-pressure valve to rotate

every several seconds 60 at a time automatically. The
left number of rotation is displayed in the second line.
NOTE
If the operation starts once, it cannot be canceled until LPV is rotating

the 50 times-rotation has been carried out. Rot. Left 50
 [PART REPLACEMENT]
Enters the replaced part No.
The part No. is recorded in the maintenance log.
PART REPLACEMENT
P/N: - -
SIL-20A/20AC 5-65
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [MAINTENANCE LOG]
Shows the maintenance log, which contains the most
recent parts replacement records (part No. and date) (up
to 20). MAINTENACE LOG
Enter to Display
Press repeatedly to show Log1 to Log10 in
sequence, and return to the title screen.
In the example on the right, the Log1 entry indicates that

a part No. S012-34567-89 was replaced on May 12, LOG 1 03-05-12
2003. P/N:012-34567-89
If less than 20 logs are recorded, the screen displays the

message as shown on the right.
No more Logs
Press CE to return to the title screen.
 [OPERATION LOG]
Shows the operation log, which contains the most recent
password settings, parameter initialization, etc. (up to
10). OPERATION LOG
Enter to Display
Press repeatedly to show Log1 to Log10 in

a password setting was made on May 12, 2003. LOG 1 03-05-12
PASSWORD CHANGED

message as shown on the right. No more Logs
5-66 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 [ERROR LOG]
Shows the error log, which contains the most recent
errors (up to 10) with their dates.
ERROR LOG
Press repeatedly to show Log1 to Log10 in Enter to Display

a leak was detected on May 12, 2003.
LOG 1 03-05-12
ERR LEAK DETECT

message as shown on the right. No more Logs 5
SIL-20A/20AC 5-67
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5.5 Validation Support Group

This group checks whether the instrument is running
correctly.
VALIDATION
Press func or VP
 [DATE]
Shows/enters the date. Date
This value returns to "00-00-00" when the power is
turned off. When the instrument is controlled by the
DATE YY-MM-DD
system controller, the date is transmitted at the
connection.
™0-00-00
Example: Setting January 2, 2003
1 Use numeric keypad to first set the year, then the

month, then the day. For the year, enter the year
Input
DATE YY-MM-DD
of the decade only. For each item, be sure to enter
2 digits (i.e. enter a zero in the tenths column if
03-01-02
necessary.).
2 When setting is complete, press .
 [TIME]
Shows/enters the time. Time
This value returns to "00:00:00" when the power is
turned off. When the instrument is controlled by the
TIME HH:MM:SS
system controller, the time is transmitted at the
connection.
™0:00:00
Example: Setting 5:30:55 p.m.
1 Use numeric keypad to first set the hours, then the

minutes, then the seconds. The display uses a 24-
Input
TIME HH:MM:SS
hour clock. For each item, be sure to enter 2 digits
(i.e. enter a zero in the tenths column if
17:30:55
necessary.).
2 When setting is complete, press .
5-68 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 [MEMORY CHECK]
Runs the memory check on ROM and RAM.
Press to start.
Results are shown when checking is completed.
MEMORY CHECK
Enter to Start
NOTE
If a Rack Changer II is connected, the memory check

result at the Rack Changer II is also displayed.
Result
SL ROM OK/RAM OK
5
 [POSITION SENS]
When is pressed, the sensors inside the
autosampler (i.e., for the needle's X direction, the rack's
Y direction, the needle's Z direction, the high-pressure POSITION SENS
valve, the low-pressure valve, and the pump) perform Enter to Start
automatic operation checks.
During the checks, the message on the right is

displayed.
POSITION SENS
Checking
The results of the checks are displayed upon completion.

If there is an error, an error message for the place with
POSITION SENS
the error is displayed. SIL SENS GOOD
SIL-20A/20AC 5-69
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [LEAK SENSOR TEST]

Carries on the operation test for leak sensor.
1 Use a syringe filled with water to wet the

thermosensor at the bottom of the leak sensor.
LEAK SENSOR TEST
Soak and Enter
2 Wait about 10 seconds. Then press .

If the sensor detects a leakage, [GOOD] will be
shown. If not, [NO GOOD] will be shown.
Leak sensor
Fig. 5.8
3 Carefully wipe the thermosensor body at the lower

side of the leak sensor until it is completely dry.
CAUTION
The sensor must be dry when exiting this screen, or
leak sensor errors may occur.
Thermosensor body
4 Press
Press
to return to the [DATE] screen.
to return to the previous screen.
Fig. 5.9
5-70 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
5.5.6 Calibration Support Group
This group calibrates the instrument.
CALIBRATION
Press func or VP
 [Input PASSWORD]
Password should be registered by a system manager.
Press , input five numbers and press .
Input PASSWORD
 Be sure to input five numbers. The default password is
[00000]. 5
If the password is input correctly, [ADJUST MTP]
function (subsequent function) appears.
If the password is not input correctly, the subsequent

functions cannot be accessed. Input PASSWORD
PASSWORD WRONG
 [ADJUST MTP]
NOTE
• When using the microtiter plate for the first time or

changing its type, the needle position against the well
needs to be adjusted.
• For details about needle position adjustment with rack-
changer racks, refer to "4.6 Adjusting Plate Positions"
in the Rack Changer Instruction Manual.
• When the tip of the needle is less visible, use the jig
rack teaching provided with the instrument.
Install and remove the jig rack teaching as described
below.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-71
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
(1) Installation of the jig rack teaching
1 Press on the initial screen. The [Z

HOME] screen will be displayed.
Fig. 5.10
2 Press . The needle rises to the highest

position and then moves to the center of the
instrument.
3 Turn OFF the power switch.
4 Loosen the screws (5 positions), slide panel F to

the right, and pull it toward you until it is removed.
5-72 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
5 Loosen one screw at the bottom right of the Z

mount, and follow steps 1 and 2 shown in "Fig.
Z mount
5.11" to attach the jig rack teaching to the Z
mount.
NOTE Jig rack

teaching Screw
Install the jig rack teaching so that it will come into close
contact with the Z mount cover.
1 Slide the jig rack teaching from the bottom of

the Z mount toward the direction shown by the
arrow.
Z mount
5
Jig rack
teaching
Screw
2 Slide the jig rack teaching from the state 1

toward the rear in the direction shown by the
arrow, and tighten the screw.
Fig. 5.11
(2) Removal of the jig rack teaching
1 Press on the initial screen.

The [Z HOME] screen will be displayed.
2 Press . The needle rises to the highest

position and then moves to the center of the
instrument.

Open the door, loosen one screw at the bottom
right of the Z mount, and remove the jig rack
teaching from the Z mount.
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the jig rack teaching after it is

removed.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-73
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4 Attach panel F so that the autosampler is sealed

off, and close the door.
WARNING
During this adjustment, operation will not stop when
the door is open. Do not reach into the auto injector
during this procedure; you could be injured.
• Adjust the needle position against the well on the

microtiter plate as described below.
1 Place the microtiter plate on the rack.
2 Press in the initial screen repeatedly

until the screen on the right is displayed.
CALIBRATION
Press func or VP
3 Input the password correctly.
4 Press .
The [ADJUST MTP] screen is displayed.
ADJUST MTP
5 Press .
The needle moves close to hole A1 in the near-
Enter to Start
side microtiter plate (the left position of the rack)
and stops.
6 Using the arrow keys, adjust the right or left and

front or rear position so that the needle is lowered
into the center of hole A1.
(The vertical direction is set with the [NEEDLE
STROKE] auxiliary function.)
"[NEEDLE STROKE]" P. 5-22
Arrow key Direction of needle movement
The needle moves 0.1 mm to the left.
The needle moves 0.1 mm to the right.
The needle moves all the way up.
The needle descends 4 mm.
The needle moves forwards 0.1 mm.
The needle moves backwards 0.1 mm.
5-74 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
7 Press .
The position is determined, the finely adjusted
position is stored in memory, and the needle
moves close to hole A1 of the rear-side microtiter
plate (the deep, left position of the rack) and
stops.
NOTE
To stop time adjustment, press CE .

The needle moves to the front.
8 Move the needle laterally in the way described in

step 6. Using the arrow keys, move it to the
position where the tip of the needle is aligned with
the center of hole A1 of the rear-side microtiter
plate. 5
9 Press .
The position is decided, its fine adjustment
position is recorded, and the needle moves
forward. The needle moves to H1 (with a 96-well
rack) or P1 (with 384-well rack), and stops.
NOTE
To stop time adjustment, press CE .

The needle moves to the front.
10 Move the as step 6.

Using and , move the edge of
needle so that it comes to the center of hole.
11 Press to confirm the position. The fine

adjustment point will be memorized.
The fine adjustment finishes, and the needle
moves to the injection port.
12 Press
Press
to display the next screen.
Press to return to the initial screen.
CE
SIL-20A/20AC 5-75
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
NOTE
• When microtiter plate racks or deep-well plate racks

are used:
The data created through teaching is saved under
each rack kind (microtiter plate rack or deep-well plate
rack) and rack type (96-well, 384-well).
"[MTP WELL]" P. 5-26
• When rack-changer racks are used:

The data created through teaching is saved under
each stack code (set value: 0 to 4).
"[STACK A CODE]" P. 5-43
• When the jig rack teaching has been used, remove the
jig from the Z mount.
 [ERASE MTP ADJ]

This screen is used to bring the microtiter plate position
data set in [ADJUST MTP] (microtiter plate adjustment)
to the initial state.
1 Input the password correctly and press

The [ADJUST MTP] screen will be displayed.
.
ADJUST MTP
Enter to Start
2 Press .
The [ERASE MTP ADJ] screen will be displayed. ERASE MTP ADJ
Enter to Erase
3 Press .
Select the data to be erased, and press .
NOTE
• When rack-changer racks are used:

Position data can be reset to the default state for each
of stack codes (set value: 0 to 4). INPUT CODE 0
When step 3 is completed, the screen at the right is Input 0 - 4
displayed. Input the stack code of which position data
is to be deleted.
4 Press
Press
to display the next screen.
5-76 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
NOTE
When using a microtiter plate rack, it is necessary to

readjust the position of the microtiter plate rack with the
[ADJUST MTP] screen.
• When executing this function, the data of the set
microtiter plate is initialized.
(The data for other microtiter plates and deep-well
plates rack is not erased.)
• Before erasing all data for microtiter plates, deep-well
plates, and rack-changer racks, remove the rack from
the autosampler.
 [ASP FACTOR]
This screen is used for compensating sample injection
5
precision. There are two compensation methods
available: automatically obtaining a factor using the
gravimetric method or directly specifying a factor.
1) [AUTO] (This factor is calculated automatically.)

Determines the sample aspiration volume compensation
factor. The factor is calculated as follows: A 1.5 mL vial is
filled with at least 1 mL of distilled water, and ten 50 µL
volumes of the water are aspirated consecutively from
the vial. The vial is then weighed (by the operator) to
determine the decrease in weight of the water. This
weight is converted into a volume value and used as the
compensation factor.
1 Press , to start the procedure.
ASP FACTOR 0
0:AUTO 1:MANUAL
ASP FACTOR 1.000

Enter to Start
SIL-20A/20AC 5-77
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2 Using a calibrated scale, weigh a vial filled with

distilled water. Then enter the weight (mg) with
numeric keypad and press . Input 1st WEIGHT
weight=4.000
3 Open the door.
4 Place the distilled water vial into rack position

No.1.
5 Close the door.
6 Press .
The sequence of 10 aspirations will begin.
Set Vial at No.1
NOTE Enter to Start
During the aspirations, the operation cannot be
canceled.
7 When all the aspirations have been completed,

the message on the right appears. Open the door
and remove the vial. Input 2nd WEIGHT
WEIGHT=3.500
8 Weigh the vial again.
9 Then enter the weight (mg), and press

The compensation factor is displayed on the
.
screen.
10 Press .
The [ASP FACTOR] screen will be displayed.
2) [MANUAL] (Enter the compensation factor directly.)
1 Press , to start the procedure.
ASP FACTOR 1.000

0:AUTO 1:MANUAL
5-78 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
2 Set the compensation factor and press

Min: 0.700
.
ASP FACTOR 1.000
Max: 1.300 Input0.700-1.300
 [LEAK THR]
Sets the level (threshold value) at which the leak sensor
is actuated. Use numeric keypad to enter the level, and
press . The setting range is [0-255]. LEAK THR 200
ActLv 62 / 255
NOTE
The [ActLv] in the bottom line of the display shows the

leak sensor's current (actual) value. If this value exceeds
the value set for [LEAK THR], the sensor detects a leak.
 [NDL SEAL]
5
Changes the needle seal replacement alert level
(i.e.total number of injections before an alert is issued),
indicating that the needle seal needs to be replaced. NDL SEAL 40000
Use numeric keypad to enter the new value and press Input Alert Lv
.
Default value: 40000 (times)
 [HPV SEAL]
Changes the high-pressure valve rotor seal replacement
alert level.
Use numeric keypad to enter the new value and press HPV SEAL 100000
. Input Alert Lv
 [LPV SEAL]
Changes the low-pressure valve rotor seal replacement
alert level.
Use numeric keypad to enter the new value and press LPV SEAL 60000
. Input Alert Lv
SIL-20A/20AC 5-79
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [EXT PUMP]
Changes the rinsing pump (optional) seal replacement
alert level (i.e.total number of injections before an alert is
issued), indicating that the needle seal needs to be EXT PUMP 700000
replaced. Input Alert Lv
Use numeric keypad to enter the new value and press
.
Default value: 700000 (second)
 [CANCEL DOORSW]
This function cancels open/close door detection.
When this function is enabled (detection is off), opening
the door will not stop the injection operation.
WARNING
When [1] is set, the autosampler will perform
injection even if the door is open or the panel F is
removed. Do not change the set value unless it is
absolutely required.
Doing so may cause injuries from the needle.
Set value Function CANCEL DOORSW 0

Automatic door open/close detection is enabled. 0:No 1:Yes
0
(default setting)
Automatic door open/close detection is

1
disabled.
CAUTION
Do not reach into the auto injector while it is
operating. You could be injured.
5-80 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 [CANCEL RACKDET]
This function can be used to cancel automatic rack
detection if it has failed due to a broken sensor or rack
detector.
Set value Function CANCEL RACKDET 0

Automatic rack position detection is enabled. 0:No 1:Yes
0
(default setting)
1 Automatic rack position detection is disabled.
NOTE
When "1" is selected, the screen at the right is displayed.

Enter the rack code number (10 to 19) using the numeric
RACK CODE 10
keypad. Input 10 - 19
5
Rack type Input value
1-mL vial rack 12
1.5-mL vial rack / 1.5-mL vial cooling

10
rack (105 vials)
1.5-mL vial cooling rack (70 vials) 11
4-mL vial rack 13
Microtitier plate rack 14
Deep-well plate rack 16
Rack-changer rack 18
Not used (reserved) 19
CAUTION
If automatic rack detection is disabled ([1]), the
needle may descend below the bottom of the vial or
well if another rack is used for analysis. This could
result in clogging or bending the needle. Except
when adjusting the rack position ("[ADJUST RACK]"
P. 5-85) or an emergency arises, set "0".
SIL-20A/20AC 5-81
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [CANCEL VIALDET]
Use numerical keypad to enter the value, and press
.
CANCEL VIALDET 0
Set value Function 0:No 1:Yes
Automatic vial detection is enabled (default
0
setting).
1 Automatic vial detection is disabled.
 [OP MODE]
Select the operation mode according to the type of
connected system controller.
Enter the number and press .

After setting, turn off the power, and then turn it on again.
OP MODE 0
Value System controller 0:20A 1:HT
0 CBM-20A, CBM-20Alite (default setting)
1 SCL-10Avp
NOTE
When [1:SCL-10Avp] is set, operation is more limited.

"5.7 Control by SCL-10Avp System Controller" P.
5-95
 [INITIALIZE PARAM]
Initializes the parameters and deletes the time programs.
Press to return to the default value and to INITIALIZE PARAM

delete the time programs. Enter to Init
NOTE
The [TOTAL OP TIME], [NDL SEAL USED], and [HPV

SEAL] valves are not erased.
"[TOTAL OP TIME]" P. 5-63
"[NDL SEAL USED]" P. 5-63
"[HPV SEAL USED]" P. 5-63
5-82 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 [PARAMETER LOCK]
In order to prohibit changing parameters by someone
except the administrator, this function locks the screen
by the password-input display. When the setting is "1: PARAMETER LOCK 0
ON", the password-input display appears at the timing of 0:Off 1:On
switching to the auxiliary function or VP function screen
from main screen.
When this setting is changed or each time the password
input is certificated, the log data is recorded to the
"OPERATION LOG".
"[OPERATION LOG]" P. 5-66
Initial screen
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
Press 5
INPUT PASSWORD
Auxiliary function screen
PARAMETER CONTROL SYSTEM

Enter to Select Enter to Select Enter to Select
Press
INPUT PASSWORD
Analysis sequence table setting screen
Editing
Sample Table
Press
INPUT PASSWORD
VP function screen
PRODUCT INFO MAINTENANCE VALIDATION CALIBRATION

Press func or VP Press func or VP Press func or VP Press func or VP
SIL-20A/20AC 5-83
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 [CHANGE PASSWORD]
Changes the password set.
CHANGE PASSWORD
1 Press .
The input screen appears.
Enter to Change
2 Input a new password and press

The password must consist of five digits.
.
3 To confirm, input the same password again.

New PASSWORD
4 The new password is enabled.
NOTE
If a wrong password is entered, you are returned to the

password input screen.
Press and return to step 2.
5-84 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 [ADJUST RACK]
WARNING
the door is open. Do not reach into the autosampler
during this procedure; Doing so may cause injuries
from the needle.
NOTE
In case of using the 1.5-mL vial cooling rack (70 vials),

after removing the rack cover, set the sample rack into
autosampler.
As it is not detected the rack code automatically, set the
rack code.
"[CANCEL RACKDET]" P. 5-81 5
After adjusting, set the "[CANCEL RACKDET]" P. 5-81
parameter to automatic detection.
1 Press .
Set a vial in position 1 of the rack used (1.5-mL,
1-mL, or 4-mL rack). Do not attach a septum to the ADJUST RACK
vial. Enter to Start
2 Press .
The needle stops above position 1 of the rack.
3 Using the arrow keys, adjust the lateral and

longitudinal positions so that the needle is lowered Set Rack&Vial 1
into the center of the vial. Enter to Start
 Adjustment of the vertical position is
unnecessary.
SET NEW POSITION
Arrow key Direction of needle movement Enter:Set CE:Ext
The needle moves down 4 mm.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-85
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
NOTE
When the needle position is less visible, use the jig rack
teaching.
4 Press .
Adjustment is completed and the needle moves to
the injection port.
NOTE
Reattach panel F if it was removed.
 [ADJUST INJ PORT]
WARNING
the door is open. Do not reach into the autosampler
during this procedure; Doing so may cause injuries
from the needle.
1 Press .
The needle stops at the front central position of
the rack. ADJUST INJ PORT
Loosen the screws at 5 locations on the front of Enter to Start
the autosampler by hand and remove panel F.
2 Loosen the screws in the top part of the Z mount

on the left and right and in the bottom part on the
Loosen by hand.
right by hand. Pull the cover forwards to remove it.

Press .
Fig. 5.12
5-86 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
3 Select the needle seal type in use.
NDLE SEAL TYPE 1

Set value Function 0:NORMAL 1:XR
Select this value for standard needle seal or
0
optional Vespel needle seal.
Select this value for optional needle seal XR

1
(S228-50390).
4 Press .
5 Use the arrow keys to adjust the position so that

the tip of the needle is at the center of the upper
side of the injection port. SET NEW POSITION
Enter:Set CE:Ext
Arrow key Direction of needle movement

5
The needle moves down 0.1 mm. (moves

approx. 5 mm, only when the needle is at the
uppermost part.)
The needle moves down 1 mm. (or approx.

Adjust the tip of the Adjust the tip of the needle
5 mm only when the needle is at the needle to the surface of to the center of the hole of
uppermost part.) the needle seal. the needle seal.
Fig. 5.13
SIL-20A/20AC 5-87
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6 Press .
In order to check that the position has been
entered correctly, the tip of the needle moves up Testing
and down approximately 2 mm at the position 1:OK 2:NG 3:MORE
where the seal is attached. Check that the needle
is lowered smoothly into the injection port as "Fig.
5.15".
Set value Function
1 The needle position is stored in memory.
2 Needle adjustment is performed again.
3 The needle position is checked again.
Fig. 5.14
7 Enter the set value [1].

The position is determined, the finely adjusted
position is stored in memory.
The needle moves to the injection position.
The needle should not move to left or right or front or

rear, when the needle goes down at the needle seal.
Fig. 5.15
8 The screen is displayed as the right drawing.

If the needle or needle seal has been changed,
the seal surface must be aged so that liquid does Aging of seal 1
not leak. 0:No 1:Yes
Select [Yes] in the screen on the right.
The needle moves up and down 50 times.
 If the needle or needle seal has not been
replaced, aging of the seal surface is not
necessary. Select [No].
Injecting
9 Select the [Z HOME] screen, and press
After installing the cover, press again.
.
I nj. Left 50
10 Reinstall the panel F and fixed with screws.
5-88 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 [ERASE RACK.P ADJ]

Use this function to initialize the rack position data.
Press .
The rack position data is erased.
ERASE RACK.P ADJ
NOTE Enter to Erase
When data has been erased, the rack position must be
readjusted in the [ADJUST RACK] screen.
"[ADJUST RACK]" P. 5-85
 [ERASE INJ.P ADJ]

Use this function before replacing the needle or needle
seal. 5
Press .
The injection port position data is erased.
ERASE INJ.P ADJ
NOTE Enter to Erase
When data has been erased, the injection port position
must be readjusted in the [ADJUST INJ.P] screen.
 [TEMP DELTA]
Calibrates the sample cooler temperature.
Enter the calibration value (the difference from the true

temperature) using the numeric keypad.
TEMP DELTA 1.0
Set range Step Input -3.0 - 4.0
-3 - 4 C 0.1 C
SIL-20A/20AC 5-89
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5.7 CBM Parameter Group

This group is for setting CBM parameters.
NOTE
CBM PARAMETER
Enter to Set
CBM parameter group is displayed when the instrument
is connected with CBM.
Press and see the Parameter.
 Displaying the Serial Number [SERIAL NUMBER]

The CBM-20A's serial number is displayed on the
second line.
SERIAL NUMBER
L202320000000
 Displaying the S/W Version Number [S/W ID]

The program version number is displayed on the first line
and the name of the system controller is displayed on the
second line. S/W ID:V1.20
CBM-20A
 Setting Communication Medium for Data Processing Unit [INTERFACE]

The current setting is displayed on the first line.
. INTERFACE 2
0:OPT,1:RS,2:ETH
Set value Function
0 Connects with optical cable.
Connects with serial transmission

1
(RS-232C).
2 Connects with Ethernet.
5-90 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 Setting Transmitting Speed of Ethernet [ETHERNET SPEED]

. ETHERNET SPEED 0
Input 0,1-4
Set value Function
0 Realizes automatically.
1 Sets to 10Mbps, Half Duplex.
2 Sets to 10Mbps, Full Duplex.
3 Sets to 100Mbps, Half Duplex.
4 Sets to 100Mbps, Full Duplex.
 Setting Used/Not used of Default Gateway [USE GATEWAY]
NOTE
5
Depending on the setting for the system controller, this
item may not require setting and so therefore may not be
displayed.

. USE GATEWAY 1
0:No 1:GW 2:DHCP
Set value Function
0 Not used.
1 Used.
2 Acquires IP address automatically.
 Setting the IP Address [IP ADDRESS]
NOTE

displayed.
The current setting is displayed on the second line.

. IP ADDRESS
192.168.100.100
NOTE
Obtain the setting from your network administrator.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-91
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Setting the Subnet Mask [SUBNET MASK]
NOTE

displayed.

. SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.0
NOTE
 Setting the Default Gateway [DEFAULT GATEWAY]
NOTE

displayed.

. DEFAULT GATEWAY
192.168.100.200
NOTE

When using the DHCP function, [---] is displayed as the
address setting.
5-92 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.5 VP Functions
 Setting the Serial Communication [TRS MODE]

The current setting for serial communications is
displayed in the first line.
Enter the set value by the numeric keypad and press TRS MODE 3
. Input 0,1-19
Set value Function
0 The communications setting is not changed.
1 Not used (reserved for expansion).
2 Connects with CLASS-VP.
3 Connects with LCsolution (default).
4-10 Not used (reserved).
11 Connects with C-R8A.
12
13
Connects with C-R7A/C-R5A.
Connects with C-R4A.

5
Connects with C-R6A (without extended ROM
14
board).
Connects with C-R6A (with extended ROM

15
board).
16-19 Not used (reserved for expansion).
SIL-20A/20AC 5-93
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.6 Control by CBM-20A or CBM-20Alite

System Controller
5.6.1 Preparation
To control the instrument by the CBM-20A or CBM-20Alite system controller, set the parameters as follows:
Set [LOCAL] to [0: Remote], [OP MODE] to [0: 20A].
Command Set Value References
LOCAL 0: Remote "[LOCAL]" P. 5-34

OP MODE 0: 20A "[OP MODE]" P. 5-82
5.6.2 Basic Parameters

The basic setting conditions and the analysis sequence are set with the CBM-20A/20Alite's analysis
sequence screen.
Refer to the CBM-20A/20Alite instruction manual for details.
5-94 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5.7 Control by SCL-10Avp System Controller
5.7 Control by SCL-10Avp System

Controller
5.7.1 Preparation
To control the instrument by the SCL-10Avp system controller, set the parameters as follows:
Command Set Value References
LOCAL 0: Remote "[LOCAL]" P. 5-34
OP MODE 1: HT1 "[OP MODE]" P. 5-82

1 To connect to SCL-10Avp: the instrument is recognized as SIL-HTA/C.
5.7.2 Required Firmware and Hardware

5
• The SCL-10Avp's firmware must be at least version 6.03.
Upgrade the firmware using the firmware upgrade kit.
• With old versions of the SCL-10Avp that do not have the [ROM INSTALLED] label attached on the right
side, internal circuits (PCBs) must be changed.
Upgrade the hardware using the hardware upgrade kit.
NOTE
This instrument cannot be controlled from a 10A-series system controller (SCL-10A or CBM-10A).
5.7.3 Attention
When using a control vial rack, set the rack number in the following way.
• 1-mL rack, 1.5-mL standard rack, 1.5-mL cooling rack, or 4-mL rack:
When performing sample injection from the control vial rack, set the rack number to [2].
• Microtiter plate rack or deep-well plate rack:
When performing sample injection from the control vial rack, set the rack number to [3].
When injecting from position 1 in the control vial rack, set [A01] or [01A], and when injecting from position
10, set [A10] or [10A].
If the control vial rack's vial number is set to [11] or a higher number or [B01-H12], sample injection stops
due to an error.
SIL-20A/20AC 5-95
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
NOTE
• With SCL-10Avp, none of the VP functions except [PRODUCT INFORMATION] can be used. Use the VP
function screens of this instrument.
• To display system check reports on screen, execute the VP function [PRODUCT INFORMATION], and
display the system check reports on the screen of the SCL-10Avp.
• The Rack Changer II (optional) cannot be used with HT compatible mode.
When using a Rack Changer II, use CBM-20A/20Alite.
• When using a rinsing pump (optional), set the parameters with the auxiliary settings screens of this
instrument.
• Display and setting of CBM-20A parameters is not possible.
"5.5.7 CBM Parameter Group" P. 5-90
5-96 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6 Troubleshooting
6
Contents
6.1 Troubleshooting and Corrective Action ............................................................ 6-2

6.2 Countermeasures against Clogging (Pressure Increase) in Flow Lines .......... 6-6
6.3 Error Messages.............................................................................................. 6-10
6. Troubleshooting
6.1 Troubleshooting and Corrective

Action
This section describes the probable causes of problems that can arise, and the corrective actions to be taken
to eliminate the causes. For more detailed procedures, refer to the indicated page.
If the problem cannot be resolved even after taking the indicated measures, or if there are problems not
included in the following tables, contact your Shimadzu representative.
Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Action Page
Power does not turn Power plug disconnected. • Connect plug correctly. P.9-10
ON even after
Power cord internal wires are • Replace with a new cord of the same type.
switching ON power. P.9-10
cut.
Power supply does not meet • Use power supply that meets specifications for
specifications for this this instrument. P.9-8
instrument.
Fuse blown. • Replace the fuse. P.8-37
No peaks. Mobile phase is not flowing. • Check whether pump is functioning normally.
1
Take corrective action as necessary.
Insufficient amount of sample • Add more sample to vials.

in vials.
Injection program incorrect. • If program is user-written, check and correct the

P.4-7
contents.
Sample path injection flow • Inspect flow lines for clogging.

P.6-6
lines clogged. Replace plumbing if clogs are found.
Column performance has • Check column performance under known

deteriorated. analysis conditions.
If performance has deteriorated, replace
column.
Detector is not functioning • Check whether detector is functioning normally.

1
normally or is not connected. Take corrective action as necessary.
1 Refer to the instruction manual for the relevant component.
6-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6.1 Troubleshooting and Corrective Action
Peak retention time Pump flow rates unstable. • Check whether pump is functioning normally.
1
fluctuates. Take corrective action as necessary.
Column temperature is • Use a column oven.

1
fluctuating.
Column performance has • Check whether column oven is functioning

deteriorated. normally. Take corrective action as necessary.
• Check column performance under known
analysis conditions. If performance has
deteriorated, replace column.
Composition of mobile phase • Replace mobile phase, and check composition

varies. of new mobile phase.
Room temperature • Install the instrument in a room with minimal

P.9-2
fluctuating. temperature variations.
There is clogging in the • Clean the high-pressure valve by a reversing

needle or the plumbing. the flow direction. P.8-43
• Clean by reversing the flow direction. If the P.8-35
6
problem persists, replace the needle or the P.8-44
plumbing.
Peak shapes are Column performance has • Check column performance under known
abnormal (peaks are deteriorated. analysis conditions. If performance has
broad, or tailing, etc.). deteriorated, replace column.
Plumbing connections • Reconfigure the plumbing.

between pump and column P.1-3
were reversed.
Dead volume exists between • Check connections for dead volume.

flow line connections. Reconfigure connections to eliminate dead P.9-13
volume.
Flow lines leaking. • See "In Case of Leaking" in this section. P.6-5
There is clogging in the • Clean the flow lines by reversing the flow
needle or the plumbing. direction.
P.8-43
• Clean the interior of the needle with a mobile
P.8-42
phase <NDLE FLUSH>.
P.8-35
• Clean by reversing the flow direction. If the
P.8-44
problem persists, replace the needle or the
plumbing.
Ghost peaks appear. No rinse solution. • Check whether rinse solution is present.
[RINSE VOL] parameter is • Increase the [RINSE VOL] setting.

P.5-21
too low.
Previous mobile phase • Clean the flow lines.

remains in mobile phase flow P.4-14
lines.
Previous rinse solution • Clean the flow lines.

P.4-15
remains in rinse flow lines.
SIL-20A/20AC 6-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6. Troubleshooting
Poor reproducibility. Flow lines are not being • [PURGE] or [RINSE] the flow lines.
rinsed sufficiently, or there is • Add rinse solution. P.4-14
no rinse solution. • Operate [PUMP HEAD FLUSH].
Composition or flow rate of • Check pump and mobile phase.

1
mobile phase varies
Needle seal is worn. • Replace the needle seal. P.8-5
Flow lines leaking. • See "In Case of Leaking" in this section. P.6-5
Room temperature is • Install the instrument in a room with minimal

P.9-2
fluctuating. temperature fluctuations.
Column performance has • Check column performance under known

deteriorated. analysis conditions. If performance has
deteriorated, replace column.
Baseline drifting. Flow lines dirty. • Thoroughly clean the instrument and detector
P.4-14
flow lines.
Faulty detector. • Check whether detector is functioning normally.

1
Room temperature is • Install the instrument in a room with minimal

P.9-2
fluctuating. temperature fluctuations.
Flow rates fluctuate. • Check whether pump is functioning normally.

1
Large pressure High-pressure valve is • Disassemble and clean high-pressure valve.

fluctuation when clogged. • If disassembly and cleaning does not unclog the P.8-21
high-pressure valve is valve, replace the rotor and stator ASSY seal.
switched.
High-pressure valve does not • The message shown below is displayed.
rotate to the correct positions. Contact your Shimadzu representative. P.6-11
<ERR HPV HOME>
Flow rate (of the mobile • Replace the outlet tubing with stainless tubing of
P.8-44
phase) is too high. 0.17 mm, 0.30 mm inner diameter.
Flow lines clogged. • Rinse the flow lines with reverse flow.
P.8-43
• Check the flow lines and replace the tubing if
P.8-44
any clogging is found.
Column inlet pressure Column is clogged. • Check column pressure. If column is clogged,
is too high. replace it.
Flow lines clogged. • Rinse the flow lines with reverse flow.
P.8-43
• Inspect the flow line. Clean or Replace any
P.8-44
clogged plumbing.
6-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6.1 Troubleshooting and Corrective Action
 In Case of Leaking
High-pressure valve Rotor and stator ASSY sealing • Replace the rotor seal, inspect the stator
P.8-21
leaking. ability has deteriorated. ASSY and replace it if necessary2
Low-pressure valve Rotor and stator sealing ability • Inspect the rotor and stator and replace them
P.8-17
leaking. has deteriorated. if necessary.2
Flow line connections Male nuts are loose or stripped. • Tighten male nuts.
leaking. • If tightening does not stop the leak, replace P.9-13
the male nuts and ferrules.
2 The high-pressure valve stator and the Low-pressure valve stator are made of ceramic.
If there are no visible scratches, they do not need to be replaced.
SIL-20A/20AC 6-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6. Troubleshooting
6.2 Countermeasures against Clogging

(Pressure Increase) in Flow Lines
If the pump pressure has noticeably increased, it may be because some portions of the flow lines have
become clogged. In such cases, disconnect tubing one by one from downstream as shown in the diagram
below. Evaluate the pressure changes to find the clogged portion.
Pressure increase
Disconnect detector No Check the flow lines of

inlet tube from column detector flow cell.
outlet 1.
Is pressure still high?
Yes
Disconnect outlet No Check or replace Has the rotor been Rinse High pressure
operated by 10,000 No valve.
tubing from column column.
inlet 2. rotations min. since "[HPV
Is pressure still high? installed, ROTATION]"of "5.5.4
Perform Reverse- maintenanced last Maintenance
Yes time, or replaced? Information Group"
rinsing outlet tubing.
Disconnect outlet Is pressure still high? No "4.6.3 Cleaning
No the High-pressure
tubing from High "8.13.2
pressure valve 3. Reverse Rinsing of Valve" Replace the high-
Is pressure still high? the Flow Lines" pressure valve rotor
and clean the stator.
Yes Yes "8.6 Replacing
Yes
Replace outlet tubing. and Inspecting High-
"8.14 Pressure Valve Rotor
Replacing Outlet and Stator ASSY"
Tubing"
Check or replace
Remove needle from
No needle seal, needle or
injection port (NDLE
sample loop.
FLUSH).
"8.13.1 Rinsing
Needle and Sample
Yes Loop"
"8.2 Replacing
Disconnect inlet
No Needle Seal"
tubing from High
"8.9 Replacing
pressure valve 4.
Needle"
"8.7 Replacing
Yes Sample Loop"
Check the mixer and /

or pumps.
6-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6.2 Countermeasures against Clogging (Pressure Increase) in Flow Lines
1
6
Column
4
3 2
High-pressure valve
Inlet tubing Outlet tubing
SIL-20A/20AC 6-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6. Troubleshooting
6.2.1 Causes and Countermeasures against Clogging

Possible causes and countermeasures against clogging that is likely to occur with LC are given below.
The following is the summary of the countermeasures for each item. When clogging is found, check those
points and take necessary measures.
Cause of Clogging Countermeasures Necessary Apparatus
Mobile phases should be filtered prior to use especially when

buffer solutions are used, because insoluble matters in the salts • Filtering apparatus with a
(1) Insoluble matters
can cause clogging. It is recommended that customers filter filter holder
in the mobile
buffer solutions using a commercially available filtering • Membrane filter (pore
phase
apparatus and 0.45 m membrane filters or less. This is also size 0.45 µm or less)
important for the column protection.
Similarly, insoluble matter in the sample can cause clogging in • Disposable filter
the system plumbing or column. If the sample is cloudy or if (Refer to p.114 - 115 of
(2) Insoluble matters
particulates are visible, filter the sample solution using a Shimadzu Column
in the sample
commercially available disposable filter before analysis. Such Catalogue for details.)
filters are available also from Shimadzu.
Dust in the environment can enter the flow line from the injection
(3) Suspended port and cause clogging. Normally this is less likely to occur
particles or dust in because the instrument is operated with the front door closed.
the environment Avoid dusty areas when working on the instrument with the front
door open for the purpose of maintenance, etc.
If a deviation of the needle position occurs by any reason, the

needle can scrape the needle seal and resulting flakes may
(4) Flakes of the cause clogging. The needle position can be checked through
needle seal in the upward and downward motion by pressing [TEST INJ PORT]
injection port ( "[TEST INJ PORT]" P. 5-33). In case a deviation of the
position is found, perform teaching of the needle on the injection
port.
Flakes of vial septa can cause clogged plumbing. Various kinds

of septum are commercially available and they differ in material
and coating. Shimadzu's genuine septa have passed
consecutive injection tests and organic solvent resistance tests.
However, due to price, some customers use septa from different
(5) Flakes of vial vendors. Although septa are usually laminated with a film (PTFE
septa for example) resistant of organic solvents to prevent flaking,
some flakes are still possible when the needle pierces the
septum. These flakes can eventually clause clogging. If using
septa from sources other than Shimadzu and clogging is a
problem, it is recommended that only Shimadzu's genuine septa
and vials be used.
6-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6.2 Countermeasures against Clogging (Pressure Increase) in Flow Lines
Cause of Clogging Countermeasures Necessary Apparatus
As the rotation of the high-pressure valve is repeated, particles

are produced from the initial wear of the PEEK rotor seal. These
particles are so fine that they seldom causes clogging in the
plumbing, but they can result in clogging at the column inlet.
When replacing the PEEK rotor seal with a new one, refer to "8.6
Replacing and Inspecting High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator
ASSY" P. 8-21. After completing the replacement, rotate the
high-pressure valve to remove any particles caused by initial
(6) Particles scraped
wear. Although wide-bore tubing can be used for plumbing to
off the rotor seal
avoid clogging, the particles may cause clogging at the column • Methanol or 2-propanol
of the high-
inlet. Consequently this is not an optimal solution, and it is
pressure valve
therefore not a desirable countermeasure. For this reason, it is
advised that wide bore tubing not be used to correct this
problem.
These precautions are also the case when this instrument is
connected to another vendor's HPLC. Note, similar attention
should be paid to other vendor's pumps and plumbing, and
necessary countermeasures taken. Clean the high-pressure
valve after approximately 10,000 injections.
The following are possible causes of particles being introduced

from the pump system.
6
(1) Particles on the flow line parts, such as the suction filter and
line filter.
(7) Particles from the (2) Particles from worn plunger seals.
• Methanol or 2-propanol
pump system To remove particles (1), especially when these parts are
replaced, rinse the pump with methanol or isopropanol for 15
minutes at 5 mL/min prior to making the connection with the SIL.
The particles (2) are trapped in the line filter of the pump; replace
the line filter at a regular intervals.
When plumbing tubing is replaced, especially tubing that is not

(8) Particles inside of pre-cut, it should be thoroughly rinsed before making
• Methanol or 2-propanol
tubing connections. Rinse with methanol or isopropanol for 15 minutes
at 5 mL/min.
SIL-20A/20AC 6-9
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6. Troubleshooting
6.3 Error Messages

The instrument has several diagnostic functions. Upon detection of a problem, an alarm sounds and an error
message appears on the display panel.
The following list describes the error messages along with the causes and corrective actions.
NOTE
Error message
Each message is classified into the following three types.
The type is indicated under the type column.
Fatal: The instrument stops operation.

ROM FAILURE
The error message is not cleared by pressing
.
Alarm: The instrument stops operation.
Press to clear the error message.
Warning: The instrument does not stop operation.
Press to clear the error message.
Error Message Type Cause and Action
ROM FAILURE Fatal Cause: ROM error (electronic failure).

Action: Turn power OFF and contact your Shimadzu
(ROM error)
representative.
RAM FAILURE Fatal Cause: RAM error (electronic failure).

Action: Turn power OFF and contact your Shimadzu
(RAM error)
representative.
ERR NDLE HOME X Fatal Cause: Needle's X-axis (sideways) movement is

incorrect.
(Needle X motor slip error)
Action: Turn the power OFF and contact your
Shimadzu representative.
ERR NDLE HOME Y Fatal Cause: Needle's Y-axis (forward/backward)

movement incorrect.
(Needle Y motor slip error)
ERR NDLE HOME Z Fatal Cause: Needle's Z-axis (up/down) movement

incorrect.
(Needle Z motor slip error)
6-10 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6.3 Error Messages
ERR HPV HOME Fatal Cause: High-pressure valve is not working correctly.
(HPV motor slip error)
ERR LPV HOME Fatal Cause: Low-pressure valve is not working correctly.
(LPV motor slip error)
ERR PUMP HOME Fatal Cause: Measuring pump does not operate correctly.
(Pump motor slip error)
ERR P.FILE Alarm Cause: Sample injection was performed incorrectly.

Action: Perform re-analysis after correcting the
(P.FILE error)
error(s) of the rack type and/or vial No. of the
sample to be injected.
NO V I A L DETECTED Alarm Cause: No vial is set at the specified vial number.

Action: During continuous analyses, the analysis
6
(Vial not detected error)
without vial is skipped and the next analysis
will start.
ERR LEAK DETECT Alarm Concentration of organic mobile phase vapor inside
the instrument has exceeded the leak sensor
(Leak detection error)
actuation level.
Cause: Leak sensor was detected leakage.
Action: Inspect the leakage from the flow line.
Wipe out spilled liquid after fixing the leakage.
Cause: Sensor is too sensitive.
Action: Adjust the leak sensor actuation level.
"[LEAK THR]" P. 5-79
NDLE PROTECTED Fatal Cause: A foreign substance was detected at the tip of
the needle.
(Foreign substance detection error)
Action: Check for foreign substances inside the
autosampler.
NO PU M P ADJUSTED Fatal Cause: Measuring pump does not operate correctly.

(Pump motor fine adjustment error)
ERR SLIP X Fatal Cause: Needle's X-axis (sideways) movement is

incorrect.
(Needle X slip error)
SIL-20A/20AC 6-11
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
6. Troubleshooting
ERR SLIP Y Fatal Cause: Needle's Y-axis (forward/backward)

movement is incorrect.
(Needle Y slip error)
ERR COOLER Fatal Cause: There is an error in the sample cooler's

cooling unit.
(Cooler error)
ERR HEATER Fatal Cause: There is an error in the sample cooler's

heating unit.
(Heater error)
ERR TEMP SENSOR Fatal Cause: There is an error in the sample cooler's
temperature sensor.
(Temperature sensor error)
SYSTEM ERROR Fatal Cause: There is an error in the autosampler's internal

circuits.
(System error)
DOOR IS OPEN Warning Cause: The front door is open or panel F has been
removed.
(Door open/close display)
Action: Close the front door or attach panel F.
ERR INJ VOL Alarm Cause: The injection volume exceeds the set value for
the maximum volume of injection.
(Injection volume error)
Action: Reduce the injection volume to a value less
than the set value of the maximum volume of
injection.
6-12 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7 Hardware Validation
7
This chapter provides instruction on hardware validation, which verifies the
performance of individual components and the instrument as a whole.
Contents
7.1 Overview of Hardware Validation ..................................................................... 7-2

7.2 Implementation of Hardware Validation ........................................................... 7-3
7.3 Validation Precautions...................................................................................... 7-4
7.4 Equipment Required for Validation................................................................... 7-5
7.5 Validation: Autosampler ................................................................................... 7-7
7.6 System Validation........................................................................................... 7-14
7.7 If Validation Fails ............................................................................................ 7-22
7. Hardware Validation
7.1 Overview of Hardware Validation
7.1.1 Hardware Validation

Hardware validation examines whether the LC system runs correctly and the instrument is suitable for the
intended analysis. Validation is performed through LC system Installation, Operation and Performance
Qualifications followed by periodic inspections. The performance of the LC system deteriorates with age,
reflecting the wear of consumable parts. Hardware validation must therefore be performed periodically from
the time of installation until the system is retired. Although validation aspects related to analysis, such as
method validation and system suitability tests should also be performed, hardware validation is a prerequisite
for these items.
7.1.2 Types of Hardware Validation

A High Performance Liquid Chromatograph consists of several LC components such as pump(s),
autosampler, column oven, and detector(s). For this reason, hardware validation is divided into the inspection
of individual components and system validation as a whole.
Component Validation To inspect whether each LC component runs

correctly.
Hardware
Validation
System Validation To inspect items that cannot be inspected as a

single component and also inspect the entire
LC system for proper function.
The operational protocol and criteria for this component and the HPLC system are described in this chapter to
assist the user in conducting validation. Refer to each the instruction manual for each component for
operational protocol of that specific component.
7-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.2 Implementation of Hardware Validation
7.2 Implementation of Hardware

Validation
7.2.1 Periodic Validation

Component and system validation must be performed at installation and every 6-12 months, as the
performance of an LC instrument changes with age. It is also important to perform maintenance such as
replacement of consumables in advance of hardware validation.
7.2.2 Daily Inspection

Daily inspection of the components and HPLC system examine the condition of maintenance parts to ensure
a high level of analysis data reliability.
Items such as column deterioration and mobile phase adjustment are examined during system suitability
tests.
7.2.3 Validation After Maintenance
7
After any maintenance, component performance must be re-validated. The type of validation depends on the
actual work done.
If the maintenance inspection cannot be performed solely by the specific component validation, system
validation is required.
NOTE
Maintenance information and results of hardware validation must be recorded and kept for future reference.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.3 Validation Precautions
7.3.1 Environment
Instrument performance may be affected by abrupt changes in ambient temperature such as drafts from
heating and air conditioning vents.
The equipment should be installed in a room with minimal (< 2 C) temperature fluctuation and away from
sources of drafts and air currents.
7.3.2 Installation Site

The installation site is very important for ensuring correct validation. The site should satisfy the following
conditions:
WARNING
• Provide ample ventilation with no fire sources in vicinity
When flammable or toxic solvents are used as the mobile phase, the room must be properly ventilated.
When flammable solvents are used, open flame or other fire sources must be strictly prohibited.
CAUTION
• Avoid dust or corrosive gas
Avoid installing the instrument in places subject to excessive dust or corrosive gas since service life
and performance levels may be affected.
• Keep away from strong magnetic fields
Do not install the instrument near equipment that generates strong magnetic fields. If the power supply
line is subject to high electrical noise, use a commercially-available power surge protector.
• Provide adequate installation surface and space
The weight of A models is approx. 27 kg and C models approx. 30 kg. During installation, consider the
entire weight combined with other LC components.
The lab table on which this instrument is installed should be strong enough to support the total weight
of the LC system. It should be level, stable and have depth of at least 600 mm.
If these precautions are not followed, the instrument could tip over or fall off the table.
When components are installed side by side, maintain a keep space of at least 30 mm between the
components.
• Regulate room temperature and humidity
The room temperature should be between 4 and 35 C, with minimal temperature variations throughout
the course of a day. Humidity should be kept within 20-85%.
• Position instrument properly in the room
Install the instrument in a location that is free from vibration and away from sunlight, and heat/air
conditioning drafts.
7-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.4 Equipment Required for Validation
7.4 Equipment Required for Validation

The equipment and samples listed below are required for hardware validation. Prepare necessary equipment
and samples depending on the system configuration of the instrument.
 Testing Equipment
A list of testing equipment required for hardware validation is shown below. A certificate ensuring traceability
or inspection results should accompany each item of testing equipment that is used.
Equipment Description
For inspection of the temperature setting accuracy for the column oven and the
autosampler's sample cooler.
Thermo recorder
The thermo recorder must be certified as having an accuracy rating of 1.0 C for the
required temperature range (0 C to 50 C) at the time of inspection.
For inspection of the temperature accuracy for the column oven.

Resistance thermometer The resistance thermometer must have a testing accuracy of 0.5 C for the required
temperature range (0 C to 50 C) at the time of inspection.
For inspection of the temperature accuracy for the column oven and autosampler's sample
cooler.
Thermocouple
The thermocouple must have a testing accuracy of ±0.6 C for the required temperature
range (0 C to 50 C) at the time of inspection.
DC voltage/current
For the hardware validation of the chromatopac.
The DC voltage/current generator must be certified as having an accuracy rating of
7
generator
±0.15% at the time of testing.
For inspection of the flow rate accuracy for the solvent delivery module.
Stopwatch
The stopwatch must be certified at 5'30" ±0.3sec at the time of inspection.
For inspection of the flow rate accuracy for the solvent delivery module.
Measuring flask
Obtain a 5 mL-measuring flask.
For inspection of the injection volume accuracy for the autosampler.

Electronic balance The balance must be calibrated and able to perform measurement with a 0.001 g precision
at the time of inspection.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Standard Reagents for Validation

A list of standard reagents required for hardware validation is shown below. The customer should prepare
standard reagents to the stated specifications.
Standard sample Part No. Description

Caffeine set for standard For inspection of the absorbance linearity for the UV-VIS
S228-45725-42
cell (5 concentrations) spectrophotometric and photodiode array detectors.
Caffeine set for semi-micro For also inspection of system reproducibility for a system equipped
S228-45727-41 with a UV-VIS spectrophotometric or photodiode array detector.
cell (5 concentrations)
For inspection of system reproducibility for a system equipped with a
refractive index detector, inspection of autosampler carry-over, and
Caffeine (250 mg/L) S228-45725-06
inspection of the gradient concentration accuracy for gradient
systems.
For inspection of system reproducibility for a system equipped with a
Anthracene (1 mg/L) S228-32996-15
spectrofluorometric detector.
Glycerol (0.872 mg/L) S228-32996-05 For inspection of the span for the refractive index detector.
 Hardware Testing Supplies

A list of supplies required for hardware validation is shown below. Note that items such as autosampler vials
or mobile phase solutions may be required in addition to the items listed.
Implement Part No. Description
I.D. 0.13 mm 2 m + I.D. 0.8 mm2 m
Resistor tube S228-45726-91 For inspection of flow rate and gradient concentration accuracy for
solvent delivery module, etc.
For inspection of the absorbance linearity for the UV-VIS
spectrophotometric and photodiode array detectors.
Syringe S046-00017-01
For also inspection of the span for the refractive index detector.
This item is provided with detectors as a standard accessory.
Syringe adapter S228-15672-91 Same as above.
Coupling 1.6C S228-16004-13 For each kind of inspection and in plumbing the detector.
Male nut, PEEK S228-18565 Same as above.
Plug S228-16006 For inspection of the drift/noise for the refractive index detector.
S200-38423
Low-pressure For inspection of the wavelength accuracy for SPD-M20A (M10Avp)
or
Hg (Mercury) lamp set and RF-20A (10AXL).
S207-21594-41
S228-34170-93 For inspection of the wavelength accuracy for SPD-M20A (M10Avp) .
S228-34478-91 For inspection of the wavelength accuracy for RF-10AXL.
Hg (Mercury) lamp holder
S228-51952-91/
For inspection of the wavelength accuracy for RF-20A.
41
PTFE block ASSY S228-34319-91 For inspection of the wavelength accuracy for RF-10AXL.
Column Particle size: 5 µm
Shim-pack VP-ODS S228-34937-91 Column Dimension: I.D. 4.6 mm  length 150 mm
or or (An equivalent ODS column may also be used.)
LUNA C18(2) 00F-4252-E0 For the system validation.
7-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.5 Validation: Autosampler
7.5.1 Check Terms

Check terms for the autosampler validation are listed below.
Check Term Description
7.5.2 ROM, RAM Self Diagnosis Checks whether the memory (ROM, RAM) functions correctly.
7.5.3 Firmware Version Check Checks the version of firmware.
7.5.4 Display, LED Test Checks the operation of display and LEDs.
7.5.5 Movement and Position Sensor Check Checks the movement and sensor parts of SIL-20A/20AC.
7.5.6 Injection Volume Accuracy Test Checks the accuracy of injection volume.
7.5.7 Leak Sensor Test Checks the operation of leak sensor.
Checks the accuracy of the set temperature of sample cooler.

7.5.8 Temperature Accuracy Test
(Only for C models)
7.5.2 ROM, RAM Self Diagnosis

 Objective 7
To check whether the memory (ROM, RAM) functions correctly.
 Check Procedure
1 Turn the power switch ON.
2 Press until [VALIDATION] appears.
3 Press until [MEMORY CHECK] appears.
MEMORY CHECK
4 Press .
"[MEMORY CHECK]" P. 5-69 SL ROM OK/RAM OK
CHECK CRITERIA : [ROM OK / RAM OK] is displayed on the screen.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.5.3 Firmware Version Check

 Objective
To check the version of firmware.
 Check Procedure
1 Press on the initial screen.

[PRODUCT INFO] appears.
2 Press until [S/W ID] appears.
"Displaying the S/W Version Number [S/W S/W ID: V1.21

ID]" P. 5-90
SIL-20AC
CHECK CRITERIA : Version number appears.

The number is same as the administrated one.
7.5.4 Display, LED Test

 Objective
To check the operation of display and LEDs.
 Check Procedure
2 Check that all the dots on the screen and LEDs on

the keypanel illuminate right after turning ON the
power. ™™™™™™™™™™™™™™™™
™™™™™™™™™™™™™™™™
CHECK CRITERIA : All the dots and LEDs on the screen illuminate.
7-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.5.5 Movement and Position Sensor Check

 Objective
To check the movement and sensor parts of this instrument.
"[POSITION SENS]" P. 5-69
 Check Procedure
1 Press until [VALIDATION] appears.
POSITION SENS
Enter to Start
2 Press until [POSITION SENS] appears.
3 Press .
POSITION SENS
Checking
POSITION SENS
SIL SENS GOOD
7
CHECK CRITERIA : [SIL SENS GOOD] appears on the screen.
7.5.6 Injection Volume Accuracy Test

 Objective
To check the accuracy of injection volume.
 Check Procedure
1 Prepare the parts as follows.
a) Isocratic or gradient LC system

b) Mobile phase and cleaning liquid: Water
Note: Degas mobile phase and cleaning liquid by the degassing unit before using.
c) Resistor tube: 0.1 mm ID  4 m
d) Sample : Water
e) Balance : able to perform measurement with 0.001 g precision and calibrated.
f) Vial : 1.5-mL vial
SIL-20A/20AC 7-9
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2 Install all the plumbing of the LC system as described in each instruction manual.
3 Connect the resistor tube between the autosampler and the inlet of the detector.
4 Clean the flow line with an appropriate solvent.
5 Replace the mobile phase and cleaning liquid with water to purge.
6 Set the flow rate to 1 mL/min, and start pumping.
7 Verify that the mobile phase flows out from the detector outlet and that there are no leaks anywhere in
the flow line.
8 Set the analysis condition as follows.
Vial capacity : 1.5 mL

Injection volume : 50 µL
Number of injections : 10 times
Run time : 1 min
9 Put 1 mL of water into a vial. Measure the weight of the vial by a calibrated balance and make a note of
it.
10 Set the vial in the sample rack and start analysis.
11 Measure the weight of the vial after analysis by a calibrated balance and make a note of it.
12 Measure the weight decrease of water in the vial between before and after analysis and calculate
injection volume at one time.
7-10 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Injection volume accuracy can be calculated as follows.

(How to calculate)
Injection volume accuracy (%) =

(Measured injection volume / (Set injection volumeNumber of injection) -1) 100
Measured injection volume:

Total volume actually injected during the set number of injection operations.
CHECK CRITERIA : Injection volume accuracy is within ±5.0%.

If the check criteria is not passed, refer to "[ASP FACTOR]" P. 5-77 to calibrate.
7.5.7 Leak Sensor Test

 Objective
To check that the leak sensor is normal.
 Check Procedure
1 Press until [VALIDATION] appears. 7
2 Press
appears.
until [LEAK SENSOR TEST] LEAK SENSOR TEST
Soak and Enter
"[LEAK SENSOR TEST]" P. 5-70
3 Use a syringe filled with water to wet the

thermosensor at the bottom of the leak sensor.
NOTE
Take care not to bend the leak sensor during the check.
(The thermosensor should not come in contact with the
leak tray of this instrument.)
4 In about 10 seconds, press

test result.
to display the
LEAK SENSOR TEST
SENSOR GOOD
CHECK CRITERIA : [SENSOR GOOD] appears on the screen.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-11
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.5.8 Temperature Accuracy Test

 Objective
Obtain the difference between the set temperature and actual temperature. (Only for C models)
 Check Procedure
1 Inject the amount of water specified below into the vial and put a cap and a septum on it. Set the vial at
the below specified place.
Vial capacity : 1.5 mL

Water capacity : 1 mL
Specified place : 1.5-mL vial cooling rack (105 vials) No. 53
2 Attach the 1.5-mL vial cooling rack (105 vials) to the instrument (C model), and insert the temperature
sensor into the vial set in step 1. The sensor must penetrate the septum and its tip touches the bottom
of the vial.
When carrying on the operation above, be careful not to bend the tip of the temperature sensor. Also be
careful of pulling sensor cable to prevent the sensor from coming off during temperature measurement.
3 Set the set temperature of sample cooler as 4 C, and start cooling. Keep the front door closed. Start
cooling at least one hour before starting the check so that measurement is ready by that time.
4 Read the thermometer and make a note of the temperature after confirming that the temperature has
reached the preset value and become stable. Calibrate the actual temperature depending on the result
of temperature measurement deviation from the temperature sensor's inspection sheet and make a
note of the temperature after calibrating.
CHECK CRITERIA
As follows, provided that room temperature is less than 30 C,
and humidity less than 60%.
Set temperature accuracy : 4 C ± 3.0 C
(When using microtiter plate, 4 C ± 6.0 C)
7-12 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
<Footnote>
The procedure of calculating the calibration (temperature
measurement deviation) is as follows.
If the calculated calibration value is to be A3, A2

A3
A2-A1
A3 =  (T3 - T1) + A1 T1
T2-T1
T3 T 2 [C]
A1
Fig. 7.1
 If the judgement that the calibration value at every interval is linear, use the formula above to calculate the
calibration value for this interval. The calibration value here means the deviation [C] from the JIS table in
the inspection sheet for thermocouple or resistance tube.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-13
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.6 System Validation
• The LC system is comprised of many individual components. System validation is used to confirm the
function of each component as well as the performance of the entire system.
• The standard system validation procedure described in this section is used to determine whether the
LC system is functioning normally. This procedure constitutes the basis of the LC system capability
inspection.
• System validation is performed at installation, and periodically thereafter. If a problem occurs during
operation, system validation may be performed to determine whether the problem is in the LC system
or in the analysis method.
• If the LC system passes the system validation, it can be assumed that the LC system is normal and that
the problem lies in the particular analysis method or conditions being used.
• If the LC system does not pass the system validation, it may be assumed that there is an abnormality in
the system, and component validation must be performed to identify the malfunctioning component(s).
7.6.1 Validation of Isocratic LC System

 Objective
An analysis is performed and the retention time and peak area are obtained for each peak. The data is then
examined to check for reproducibility. Reproducible data validates the system.
Generally, the system being validated consists of a minimum of the following components: pump, column
oven, autosampler, detector, system controller and data processor.
 Items Required for Validation

Item Description
Mixture of water and methanol (3/2, v/v)

Mobile phase
Both the water (distilled) and the methanol should be HPLC grade.
Shim-pack VP-ODS (Part No. S228-34937-91), LUNA C18 (2) (Part No. 00F-4252-E0)
Column
or equivalent ODS column (Particle size 5 µm, Column Dimension: I.D. 4.6 mm × length 150 mm)
20 mg/L caffeine solution (included in Caffeine set (5 concentrations), Part No. S228-45725-42) or
caffeine solution prepared as described below.
<Preparation>
Sample
Weigh 20 mg of anhydrous caffeine, transfer to a 100 mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume
with water.
Transfer 1 mL of the solution to a 10 mL volumetric flask, and dilute to volume with water.
Water HPLC grade, or equivalent
2-propanol HPLC grade, or equivalent
7-14 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Checking and Preparing the LC System

1 Check all the wiring connections in the LC system.
Refer to individual component instruction manuals
Detector
for details. If a Chromatopac is used, it should be
connected to the detector with the signal cable
connector provided with the Chromatopac, and
the signal cable should then be connected to the
integrator terminal of the detector.
 If the system normally uses Chromatopac or LC Autosampler
workstation, the connections used for regular
analysis will be satisfactory.
2 Check the LC system plumbing.

Ensure that the tubing between (a) the
Coupling
1.6C
autosampler outlet and the column inlet, (b) the

column outlet and the detector inlet, has an I.D. of
less than 0.3 mm, and is shorter than 300 mm.
Keep the liquid volume that is not in the column as
low as possible.
Fig. 7.2
3 Clean the system flow lines using one of the

procedures described below.
Detector
7
Before cleaning the flow lines, remove the column
from the system, and connect the column inlet to
the column outlet with a coupling 1.6C ("Fig. 7.2").
< For a new system > Autosampler

Clean the flow lines first with 2-propanol, then with Tubing
water. In each case, pass the liquid through the
flow lines for 10 minutes, at a rate of 2 mL/min.
<For a system in use that uses a mobile phase Column
with a low dielectric constant, such as

hexane>
The procedure is the same as that of a new Tubing
system, given above.
Fig. 7.3
<For a system that has been using a mixture of

a water solution and an organic solvent as
mobile phase, or water plus an organic solvent
miscible with water (methanol, acetonitrile,
etc.)>
Clean the flow lines with water. Pass water
through the flow lines for 10 minutes, at a rate of
2 mL/min.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-15
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4 When cleaning is finished, pour mobile phase

(mixture of water and methanol (3/2, (v/v)) into the
reservoir, and reconnect the column with the LC
system ("Fig. 7.3"). Pour water into the reservoir
as a rinse liquid, and purge the flow line.
 Validation Procedure
1 Set the pumping flow rate to 1 mL/min.

See the pump's instruction manual for setting
Pump display screen
procedures.
1.000mL MAX 20.0
0.0MPa MIN 0.0
2 Set the column oven temperature to 40 C.

See the column oven's instruction manual for
Column oven's display screen
setting procedures.
SET TEMP 40
Input 4 - 85
3 Press on the pump keypad, and

on the column oven keypad. Pumping and
temperature regulation will start.
Verify that liquid flows through the detector outlet
tubing, and that there are no leaks from any of the
connections.
4 Set the detector parameters.

"Parameter Settings for Isocratic System
Detector display screen
Validation" P. 7-17
272nm 0.000 AU
See the detector's instruction manual for setting
procedures.
D2 1.0000AUFS
5 Set the autosampler parameters.

Validation" P. 7-17
See the autosampler's instruction manual for
setting procedures.
6 Set the data processor parameters.

Validation" P. 7-17
See the data processor's instruction manual for
setting procedures.
7-16 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7 Monitor the baseline.

When the baseline has stabilized, press the
detector zero key, then inject 10 µL of mobile
phase, and verify that no peaks are observed.
8 Inject 10 µL of the test sample six times, and

analyze the data obtained.
RSD(C.V.)=(SD/X)  100
n
(XiX)2
i 1
SD =
9 From the peak data obtained from the six
analyses, derive the relative standard deviation
n1
X =(X1 + X2 •••• Xn 1 + Xn)/n

(RSD coefficient of variation (C.V.)) for: retention n : Number of analyses
time and peak area ("Fig. 7.4"). X1••Xn : Retention time (or areas) of each peak
X : Average
SD : Standard deviation
RSD : Relative standard deviation
C.V. : Coefficient of variation
Fig. 7.4
 Parameter Settings for Isocratic System Validation
The parameters to be set for the various devices when validation analysis of an isocratic system is performed
are given below.
• Pump .....................Flow rate : 1 mL/min

P.Max
• Column oven .........Oven temperature
: 20.0 MPa
: 40 C 7
• Time program ........5.00 STOP
• autosampler...........RINSE VOLUME : 200 µL
RINSE SPEED : 35 µL/s
SAMPLING SPEED : 15 µL/s
RINSE MODE : 0 (No needle rinsing)
• Detector .................Wavelength : 272 nm
AUX RNG : 2 (1AU/V)
RESPONSE : 3 (0.5s)
• Data processor ......WIDTH :5
DRIFT :0
T.DBL : 1000
ATTEN : 10 (1,024 mAUFS)
SLOPE : 1000
MIN.AREA : 100000
STOP.TM :5
CHECK CRITERIA
The RSD (C.V.)'s obtained must satisfy the following criteria:
Retention time RSD must not exceed 0.5%.
Peak area RSD must not exceed 1.0%.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-17
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.6.2 Validation of Gradient LC System

 Objective
An analysis is performed and the retention time and peak area are obtained for each peak. The data is then
examined to check for repeatability. Reproducible data validates the system.
Generally, the system being validated consists of a minimum of the following components: pump, column
oven, autosampler, detector, system controller and data processor.
 Items Required for Validation

Item Description
A: Distilled water
B: Methanol
Mobile phases
A /B =60%/40%
Both the water (distilled) and the methanol should be HPLC grade.
Shim-pack VP-ODS (Part No. S228-34937-91), LUNA C18 (2) (Part No. 00F-4252-E0) or
Column
equivalent ODS column (Particle size 5 µm, Column Dimension: I.D. 4.6 mm × length 150 mm)
20 mg/L caffeine solution (included in Caffeine set (5 concentrations), Part No. S228-45725-42)
or caffeine solution prepared as described below.
< Preparation >
Sample
Weigh 20 mg of anhydrous caffeine, transfer to a 100 mL volumetric flask and dilute to volume
with water.
Transfer 1 mL of the solution to a 10 mL volumetric flask, and dilute to volume with water.
Water HPLC grade, or equivalent
2-propanol HPLC grade, or equivalent
 Checking and Preparing the LC System

1 Check all the wiring connections in the LC system.
Refer to individual component instruction manuals
for details. If a Chromatopac is used, it should be Detector
connected to the detector with the signal cable
connector provided with the Chromatopac, and
the signal cable should then be connected to the
integrator terminal of the detector.
 If the system normally uses Chromatopac or LC
workstation, the connections used for regular Autosampler
analysis will be satisfactory.
2 Check the LC system plumbing.

In particular, ensure that the tubing between (a) Coupling
1.6C
the autosampler plumbing outlet and the column
inlet, and (b) the column outlet and the detector
inlet, has an I.D. of thinner than 0.3 mm, and is
shorter than 300 mm. keep the liquid volume that
is not in the column as low as possible.
Fig. 7.5
7-18 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3 Clean the system flow lines. There are different

cleaning cases as described below. Before
Detector
cleaning the flow lines, be sure to remove the
column from the system, and connect the column
inlet and outlet with a coupling 1.6C ("Fig. 7.5").
< For a new system >

Clean the flow lines first with 2-propanol, then with Autosampler
water. In each case, pass the liquid through the Tubing
flow lines for 10 minutes, at a rate of 2 mL/min.
< For a system in use that uses a mobile phase

Column
with a low dielectric constant, such as hexane >
The procedure is the same as that of a new
system, given above.
Tubing
< For a system that has been using a mixture Fig. 7.6
of a water solution and an organic solvent as
mobile phase, or water plus an organic solvent
miscible with water (methanol, acetonitrile,
etc.) >
Clean the flow lines with water. Pass water
7
through the flow lines for 10 minutes, at a rate of
2 mL/min.
4 When cleaning is finished, pour mobile phase

(A: water, B: methanol) into the reservoir, and
reconnect the column with the LC system ("Fig.
7.6"). Pour water into the reservoir as a rinse
liquid, and purge the flow line.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-19
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Validation Procedure
1 Set the pumping flow rate to 1 mL/min, and set the
concentration of mobile phase B parameter to
Pump's display screen
40%.
See the pump's instruction manual for setting
1.000mL MAX 20.0
procedures. 0.0MPa MIN 0.0
A: 60.0 B:™ 40.0

C: 0.0 D: 0.0
2 Set the column oven temperature to 40 C.

See the column oven's instruction manual for
Column oven's display screen
setting procedures.
SET TEMP 40
Input 4 - 85
3 Press on the pump panel, and
on the column oven panel. Pumping and
temperature regulation will start.
Verify that liquid flows through the detector outlet
tubing, and that there are no leaks from any of the
connections.
4 Set the detector parameters.

"Parameter Settings for Gradient System
Detector's display screen
Validation" P. 7-21
272nm 0.000 AU
See the detector's instruction manual for setting D2 1.0000AUFS
procedures.
5 Set the autosampler parameters.

Validation" P. 7-21
See the autosampler's instruction manual for
setting procedures.
6 Set the data processor parameters.

Validation" P. 7-21
See the data processor's instruction manual for
setting procedures.
7-20 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7 Monitor the baseline.

When the baseline has stabilized, press the
detector zero key. Then inject 10 µL of mobile
phase and verify that no peaks are observed the
second time.
8 Inject 10 µL of the test sample six times, and

analyze the data obtained.
RSD(C.V.)=(SD/X)  100
n
(XiX)2
i 1
SD =
9 From the peak data obtained from the six
analyses, derive the relative standard deviation
n1
X =(X1 + X2 •••• Xn 1 + Xn)/n

(RSD coefficient of variation (C.V.)) for: retention n : Number of analyses
time and peak area ("Fig. 7.7"). X1••Xn : Retention time (or areas) of each peak
X : Average
SD : Standard deviation
RSD : Relative standard deviation
C.V. : Coefficient of variation
Fig. 7.7
 Parameter Settings for Gradient System Validation
The parameters to be set for the various devices when validation analysis of a gradient system is performed
are given below.
• Pump .......................Flow rate

B.CONC
P.Max
: 1 mL/min
: 40%
: 20.0 MPa
7
• Column oven ...........Oven temperature : 40 C
• Time program ..........5.00 STOP
• Autosampler ............RINSE VOLUME : 200 µL
RINSE SPEED : 35 µL/s
SAMPLING SPEED : 15 µL/s
RINSE MODE : 0 (No needle rinsing)
• Detector ...................Wavelength : 272 nm
AUX RNG : 2 (1AU/V)
RESPONSE : 3 (0.5s)
• Data processor ........WIDTH :5
DRIFT :0
T.DBL : 1000
ATTEN : 10 (1,024 mAUFS)
SLOPE : 1000
MIN.AREA : 100000
STOP.TM :5
CHECK CRITERIA
The RSD (C.V.)'s obtained must satisfy the following criteria:
Retention time RSD must not exceed 0.5%.
Peak area RSD must not exceed 1.0%.
SIL-20A/20AC 7-21
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7.7 If Validation Fails

Should the system fail to satisfy any of the system validation check criteria, or should a component fail to
satisfy any of the component validation check criteria, proceed as follows.
 Check the Service Life of Consumables

Examine the following parts for wear, and replace them if necessary.
Part Name Page
Needle seal "8.2 Replacing Needle Seal" P. 8-5
High-pressure valve's rotor, stator "8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-Pressure Valve Rotor and
ASSY Stator ASSY" P. 8-21
"8.5 Replacing and Inspecting Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and

Low-pressure valve's rotor, stator
Stator" P. 8-17
 Check the Flow Lines

• Ensure that the instrument has not been placed directly under a heating or air conditioning vent. The room
temperature should fluctuate little. If the instrument is in the condition above, move the instrument.
• Replace old vial septa with new ones. An old septum can cause cross contamination.
• Ensure that there are no leaks at plumbing connections.
If leaks occur, take the appropriate measures to correct them.
• Ensure that the pressure difference is minimal when the high-pressure valve rotates.
If not, the needle or plumbing may be clogged. Reverse the flow to clean, or replace the clogged item.
 Check Other Components

• Check the pump.
A faulty pump can cause wide variations in the peak retention times.
• Check the detector.
Check for detector abnormalities by looking at the noise and drift level, light source intensity, and the
wavelength value.
If the check criteria is not passed after checking terms above, or if troubleshooting or corrective action
procedures are unclear, contact your Shimadzu representative.
 Perform Troubleshooting
It is possible that some minor problem (such as air bubbles) has caused the system to fail the criteria.
Perform troubleshooting to check for such problems, and take action to eliminate any problems found.
For troubleshooting procedures for individual system components, see the applicable instruction manuals.
 If a Cause cannot Be Determined, Contact your Shimadzu Representative

If you are unable to determine the cause of the failure, or if you are unclear about troubleshooting or
corrective action procedures, contact your Shimadzu representative.
7-22 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8 Maintenance
8
Contents
8.1 Periodic Inspection and Maintenance .............................................................. 8-2

8.2 Replacing Needle Seal..................................................................................... 8-5
8.3 Replacing Plunger Seal.................................................................................... 8-8
8.4 Replacing and Inspecting Measuring Pump Plunger ..................................... 8-13
8.5 Replacing and Inspecting Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator................... 8-17
8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY ....... 8-21
8.7 Replacing Sample Loop ................................................................................. 8-28
8.8 Inspecting (Replacing) and Ultrasonic Bath Cleaning of Suction Filter.......... 8-33
8.9 Replacing Needle........................................................................................... 8-35
8.10 Replacing Fuse .............................................................................................. 8-37
8.11 Replacing Panel F.......................................................................................... 8-39
8.12 Replacing Rinsing Port Cap ........................................................................... 8-40
8.13 Rinsing Flow Lines ......................................................................................... 8-42
8.14 Replacing Outlet Tubing................................................................................. 8-44
8.15 Exterior Cleaning............................................................................................ 8-48
8.16 Maintenance for Long Periods without Use ................................................... 8-49
8.17 Maintenance for Continuous Use over Extended Periods ............................. 8-50
8. Maintenance
8.1 Periodic Inspection and Maintenance

It is necessary to perform periodic inspections of this instrument to ensure its safe use.
It is possible to have these periodic inspections performed by Shimadzu service representatives on a
contractual basis.
For information regarding the maintenance inspection contract, contact your Shimadzu representative.
WARNING
• Unless the instructions here specified, turn off the power always and unplug the instrument prior to
performing inspection and maintenance. Otherwise, fire, electric shock or malfunction may occur.
CAUTION
• When replacing parts, use only the parts listed in "1.4 Component Parts" and "9.5 Maintenance Parts".
If any other parts are used, injury or malfunction may occur.
• Never remove the main cover. Otherwise, injury or malfunction may occur.
Contact your Shimadzu representative to remove the main cover.
8.1.1 Prior to Inspection and Maintenance

• Replace the mobile phase in the flow lines with water.
• Wipe away any dirt from the front panel and the main cover.
• Wipe away any dirt from the keypad with tissue paper or a soft cloth moistened with water.
• Be sure to stop the pump before any inspection or maintenance work.
• When the work is finished, reinstall the panel F before starting the pump.
8.1.2 List of Periodic Inspection and Maintenance
NOTE
The replacement and maintenance periods listed in this table are not guarantee periods, but are presented
only as guidelines. These will vary depending on usage conditions.
Maintenance Items Based on Usage Frequency
Inspection/Maintenance Item Maintenance Timing Page
Replace after approximately 40,000

Replacement of needle seal P.8-5
injections.

Replacement of low-pressure valve rotor P.8-17
injections.
8-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.1 Periodic Inspection and Maintenance
Inspection/Maintenance Item Maintenance Timing Page

Replacement of low-pressure valve stator P.8-17
injections.
Replace after approximately 100,000 times

Replacement of high-pressure valve rotor (Applies when a mixture of water and organic P.8-21
solvent is used). 1
Replace after approximately 200,000 times

Replacement of high-pressure valve stator (Applies when a mixture of water and organic P.8-21
solvent is used).
Cleaning the high-pressure valve Carry after approximately 10,000 times. P.8-21

Replacement of sample loop P.8-28
injections.

Needle replacement P.8-35
injections.

Replacement of rinsing port cap P.8-40
injections. 2
Replace after approximately 40,000 Contact your Shimadzu

Replacement of vial detection spring
injections. representative
Replace after approximately 700,000 Contact your Shimadzu

Rinsing pump (optional)
seconds. representative
Maintenance Items Based on Years Used
Maintenance Interval
Inspection/Maintenance Item 1
year
2
years
3
years
6
years
Remark Page
8
Replacement of measuring
× P.8-8
pump plunger seal
Replacement of measuring
× P.8-13
pump plunger
Replacement of solvent filter × P.8-33
Replace when the

clogging does not
Replacement of outlet tubing × P.8-44
remove after reverse
cleaning.
Replacement of panel F(C Replace if there is

× P.8-39
models only) excessive condensation.
Cleaning and oiling of the

Contact your Shimadzu
needle drive section (Z ×
representative
mount)
Cleaning and oiling of the

measuring pump drive ×
representative
section
SIL-20A/20AC 8-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
Maintenance Interval
Inspection/Maintenance Item 1 2 3 6 Remark Page
year years years years
Cleaning and oiling of other Contact your Shimadzu

×
drive sections representative

Fuse replacement ×
representative
1 There are types of buffer solution that crystal or insoluble matter remains when dried up. Using such solution as a mobile phase and
keeping the instrument unused for a long time thereafter may significantly shorten the rotor lifespan. To prevent this, cleanse the flow
path thoroughly with distilled or deionized water after the use.
2 If you have too much cross contamination, replace the rinsing port cap.
8-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.2 Replacing Needle Seal

Necessary parts
Part Type Part No. Remark
Needle seal PEEK 20A Consumable part S228-42325-01
Optional
Vespel needle seal Consumable part S228-48258-91
(for GPC analysis)
Optional (for ultra high speed

analysis)
Needle seal XR kit Repair part / This is a small-capacity needle
S228-50452-92
1, 2 Consumable part seal kit made of PEEK.
A needle seal, a housing, and
a cap are included.
1 When removing or mounting the needle seal XR, a spanner 8  10 (Part No. S086-03006) and the dedicated removal tool (Part No.
S228-50570) are required. A spanner 8  10 is provided as standard while the removal tool is not. Please purchase a removal tool as
well when purchasing a needle seal XR for the first time.
2 If you purchase an additional needle seal XR for replacement, select any of the following three types depending on the part you need
to replace.
Needle seal XR Consumable part S228-50390 Needle seal: 1 pc.
Housing, Needle seal XR Replacement part S228-50391 Needle seal housing: 1 pc.
8
Consumable part/ Set of housing and 3 needle
Needle seal XR kit S228-50452-93
Replacement part seals.
NOTE
For details about the mounting procedure, refer to the instruction manual packed with the needle seal XR kit
(S228-50452-92).
SIL-20A/20AC 8-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.2.1 Removing the Needle Seal
1 From the initial screen, press .

The [Z HOME] screen on the right is displayed.
ZHOME
Enter to Start
2 Press .
The needle rises to the highest position and then
moves to the center of the autosampler.
4 Open the door, and remove the sample racks.
5 Loosen the screws and then slide the panel F a

little to the right before pulling it forward to remove
it.
Fig. 8.1
6 Loosen the needle seal by hand and remove it.
Fig. 8.2
8-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.2.2 Attaching the Needle Seal
1 Insert the new needle seal into the high-pressure

valve and tighten it by hand so that it is fixed.
CAUTION
Do not use a spanner or some other tool to attach the
needle seal. Doing so may damage the seal.
2 Reattach the panel F so that the autosampler is

hermetically sealed and close the door.
Fig. 8.3
CAUTION
If the panel F has not been reattached properly,
condensation may occur in the sample cooler.
3 Turn ON the power switch.
8
4 From the initial screen, press twice.
The maintenance information group screen is
displayed. MAINTENANCE
Press func or VP
5 Press until [NDL SEAL USED] appears.

The usage frequency and replacement alert value
for the needle seal are displayed.
6 Press and
Reset the counter to [0].
.
NDL SEAL USED
0 / 40000
SIL-20A/20AC 8-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.3 Replacing Plunger Seal

Necessary parts
Part Type Part No.
Plunger seal Consumable part S228-35145
8.3.1 Before Removing Pump Head
1 Press CE until the initial screen appears.
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
2 Press repeatedly until the Maintenance

Information screen on the right is displayed. MAINTENANCE
Press func or VP
3 Press repeatedly until the [P-SET]

screen on the right is displayed.
P-SET
Enter to P-SET
4 Press .
The plunger will be fully retracted.
CHANGE THE SEAL
Enter t o Finish
8.3.2 Removing the Pump Head
1 Open the door.
2 Using the wrench provided, loosen and remove

the flow line male nuts at the top and bottom of the
pump head.
8-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
3 Using the Allen wrench provided, loosen the two

hex socket head bolt in the pump head, and
remove the pump head.
Pump head
4 Ease the pump head out gently, keeping it aligned

with the plunger at all times.
Hex socket head bolt
CAUTION
If the pump head is pulled out diagonally, the plunger
Head holder
could be broken.
Fig. 8.4
8.3.3 Replacing the Plunger Seal
1 Remove the seal holder gently in the horizontal

direction aligning it with the plunger to prevent
damage to the plunger. Seal holder
8
Plunger seal
Fig. 8.5
2 Insert the flanged end of the seal installer/remover

tool into the seal vertically.
Smooth side
Seal installer/
remover tool
Flanged side
Plunger seal
Seal holder
Fig. 8.6
SIL-20A/20AC 8-9
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
3 Pull out the tool to remove the used seal vertically.

The measuring pump seal is removed from the
seal holder. Seal installer/
remover tool
Plunger seal
Seal holder
Fig. 8.7
4 Remove any contamination present on the pump

head and seal holder.
Cleaning the measuring pump head wipe the
inside of the pump head and seal holder using soft
cloth or paper soaked with 2-propanol.
NOTE
If any material remains on these surfaces, the plunger

cannot maintain a seal.
5 Place the new seal on the straight end of the seal

installer/remover tool.
(Refer to Fig. 8.8 about seal direction.)
6 Lower the seal into the seal holder, then remove

the seal installer/remover tool.
Straight
end
New plunger
seal
Fig. 8.8
8-10 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.3.4 Installing the Pump Head
1 Push the seal holder in slowly aligning it with the

plunger, and then push the pump head in slowly
The side with the marking must be at the top.
and gently horizontally.

Seal holder
Pump head
CAUTION
If the pump head is pushed in forcefully, the plunger
could be broken.
Plunger seal
NOTE
Fig. 8.9
Press the seal surface using soft cloth or paper soaked
with 2-propanol when installing the seal holder to prevent
the dropping out the seal.
2 Place the two hex socket head bolts into the holes
in the pump head, and screw them in alternately
and uniformly with provided Allen wrench. Pump head

NOTE
Screw the bolts in alternately 90. At the end, tighten the
8
bolts securely with the Allen wrench.
Head holder
Fig. 8.10
3 Reconnect the tubing to the top and bottom of the

pump head, and tighten the nuts.
4 Close the doors.
5 Press .
Return the plunger to the original position.
CHANGE THE SEAL
Enter t o Finish
6 Press .
Start purging of the flow lines.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-11
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.3.5 Check after Replacement

After replacing a plunger seal, check the following:
• There is no leakage from the gap between the pump head and the head holder.
• There is no leakage from the rinse flow line.
NOTE
When not even after replacement of the plunger seals, the surfaces of the plunger may be scratched or
nicked. If the plunger is scratched or nicked, replace it with a new plunger.
"8.4 Replacing and Inspecting Measuring Pump Plunger" P. 8-13
8-12 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.4 Replacing and Inspecting Measuring Pump Plunger
8.4 Replacing and Inspecting Measuring

Pump Plunger
Necessary parts
Part Type Part No.
Measuring pump plunger Replacement part S228-35010-91
8.4.1 Before Removing the Measuring Pump Plunger
1 Press
screen.
CE repeatedly to display the initial
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
2 Press repeatedly to display the

Maintenance Information screen on the right.
MAINTENANCE
Press func or VP
8
3 Press repeatedly to display the [P-SET]
screen on the right.
P-SET
Enter to P-SET
4 Press .
The plunger will be fully retracted.
CHANGE THE SEAL
Enter t o Finish
8.4.2 Replacing the Measuring Pump Plunger
1 Open the door.
2 Using the Allen wrench provided, loosen and

remove the flow line male nuts at the top and
bottom of the pump head.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-13
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
3 Using the Allen wrench provided, loosen the two

hex socket head bolts in the pump head.
4 Pull the pump head out gently aligning it with the

seal holder, and then pull the seal holder out
gently and horizontally aligning it with the plunger. Seal holder
Pump head
CAUTION
If the pump head is pulled out diagonally, the plunger
could be broken.
Fig. 8.11
5 Using the plunger tool (Part No. S228-34672-02),

rotate the plunger holder counterclockwise and
remove the plunger ASSY.
Plunger tool
CAUTION
When sliding the plunger tool onto the plunger, be Plunger
careful not to damage the plunger.
Fig. 8.12
6 Inspect the plunger for visible nicks or scratches.

• Replace the plunger ASSY if it is damaged.
• If it is not damaged but there is contamination
present, remove the contamination. Wipe the Plunger ASSY
inside of the pump head and seal holder using
wiper paper soaked with 2-propanol. Clean/Inspect
NOTE
The measurement accuracy may be reduced if there is

any seal residue or other matter on the plunger.
Fig. 8.13
8-14 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.4 Replacing and Inspecting Measuring Pump Plunger
8.4.3 Installing the Measuring Pump Plunger
1 Hold the plunger ASSY between the thumb and

fingers, and hand-tighten it into the pump body.
2 Use the plunger tool to thoroughly tighten the

plunger ASSY.
Plunger tool
3 Push the seal holder in gently and horizontally

aligning it with the plunger, and then push the
Pump body
pump head in gently and horizontally aligning it
with the seal holder.
Fig. 8.14
CAUTION
If the pump head is pushed in forcefully, the plunger
could be broken.
NOTE
Press the seal surface using wiper paper soaked with

2-propanol when installing the seal holder to prevent the
dropping of the seal.
4 Place the two hex socket head bolts into the holes
in the pump head, and screw them in alternately
8
and uniformly with provided Allen wrench.
NOTE
Screw the bolts in alternately 90. At the end, tighten the

bolts securely with the Allen wrench.
5 Reconnect the tubing to the top and bottom of the

pump head, and tighten the nuts.
6 Close the doors.
7 Return the plunger to the original position by

pressing .
8 Press to start purging of the flow lines.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-15
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.4.4 Check after Replacement

After replacing the measuring pump plunger seal, check the following:
• There is no leakage from the gap between the pump head and the head holder.
• There is no leakage from the piping connection.
8-16 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.5 Replacing and Inspecting Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator
8.5 Replacing and Inspecting Low-

Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator
CAUTION
If liquid is leaked from the low-pressure valve, first check that the rotor is not damaged in the way
described in steps 1 to 7 of "8.5.1 Removing the Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator". If there is no
damage, carefully wipe the rotating and sliding surfaces of the rotor and stator with using wiper paper
soaked with 2-propanol. Dirt or dust on the sliding surfaces may adversely affect the sealing and cause
liquid to be leaked. If liquid leakage persists, replace the rotor and stator.
Necessary parts
Part Type Part No.
Low-pressure valve rotor Consumable part S228-36923
Stator 5PV Replacement part S228-36917-01
8.5.1 Removing the Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator
1 Turn the power switch OFF and open the door.
8
2 Lower the rinse solution container to a position
lower than the low-pressure valve.
3 Using a wrench, loosen and remove all of the flow

line male nuts from the housing.
4 Loosen and remove the three hex socket head

bolts with the M4 Allen wrench.
Male nut Hex socket head bolt
Male nut
Housing
Fig. 8.15
SIL-20A/20AC 8-17
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
5 Remove the stator, ring and stator ASSY. As they

are not connected, be careful not to drop any of
Rotor part
the pieces when lifting them from the instrument.
NOTE
Remove the ring and housing slowly to prevent the stator

and packing from dropping out of the stator ASSY. Stator part
Fig. 8.16
6 Grip the rotor securely, and pull it out of the

instrument. Rotor
NOTE
Ring
When handling the rotor, try to only touch the outer
circumference. When returning the rotor to the
instrument, wipe all sliding contact surfaces with
2-propanol.
Stator ASSY
7 Inspect the sliding surfaces of the rotor and the

stator for visible nicks or scratches.
Fig. 8.17
If the rotor or stator is damaged, replace the parts.

If the rotor or stator is not damaged, wipe the
surface of rotor and stator using wiper paper
soaked with 2-propanol.
8 Place the rotor, stator, packing and housing in 2-

propanol, and sonicate them for five minutes.
8-18 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.5 Replacing and Inspecting Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator
8.5.2 Installing the Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator
1 Align the notch in the rotor with the mark on the

shaft, and push the rotor all the way back onto the Alignment Mark
shaft. Notch
Rotor
NOTE
Shaft
Shaft
When handling the rotor, try to only touch the outer
circumference. When returning the rotor to the
Rotor Alignment
instrument, wipe all sliding contact surfaces with
Mark
2-propanol. Sliding Notch
contact
surface
Fig. 8.18
2 Reassemble the housing in the order indicated in

the figure to the right.
NOTE Ring
Assembling the stator, packing and housing with the Stator

protrusion of the stator facing the ring, assemble the
Stator Packing
stator and packing to that the holes are aligned. ASSY
Housing
Fig. 8.19 8
3 With the stator facing out of the instrument, insert
the ring and stator ASSY into the body. Be careful
not to drop the stator.
Stator part
Fig. 8.20
SIL-20A/20AC 8-19
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
4 Screw the three hex socket head bolts into the

housing, tightening them gradually with the Allen
wrench provided.
NOTE
Alternately tighten three hex socket head bolts 90° at a

time. Ensure that the hex socket head bolts are secured
firmly. Use the long end of the Allen wrench as a handle
to tighten them securely.
5 Reconnect the flow line tubing that was

disconnected in step number 3 of "8.5.1 Removing
Fig. 8.21
the Low-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator".
6 Close the door.
8.5.3 Resetting the Usage Frequency
1 Reset the low-pressure valve rotor counter.
2 Turn the power ON and press repeatedly

until the Maintenance Information screen on the
right is displayed in the initial screen. MAINTENANCE
Press func or VP
3 Press repeatedly until the [LPV SEAL

USED] screen on the right is displayed. LPV SEAL USED
The usage frequency and replacement alert value 0 / 60000
of the low-pressure valve's rotor seal are
displayed on the screen.
4 Press and
.
5 Press
screen.
CE until screen return to the initial
8-20 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY
8.6 Replacing and Inspecting High-

Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator
ASSY
CAUTION
If liquid has leaked from the high-pressure valve, first check that the rotor is not damaged as described in
steps 1 to 5 of "8.6.2 Removing the High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY". If there is no damage,
carefully wipe the rotating and sliding surfaces of the rotor and stator with using wiper paper soaked with
2-propanol. Dirt or dust on the sliding surfaces may adversely affect the sealing and cause liquid to be
leaked. If liquid leakage persists, replace the rotor and stator ASSY.
Necessary Parts
Part Type Part No. Model Remark
High-pressure valve SIL-20A/20AC/20AHT/

Consumable part S228-41310-92
rotor 20ACHT
Stator HPV ASSY Replacement part S228-45408-91 SIL-20A/20AC PEEK housing
Stator HPV ASSY Replacement part S228-45408-93 SIL-20AHT/20ACHT Stainless steel housing
8.6.1 Before Removing the High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY 8
ZHOME
Enter to Start
2 Press .
3 Turn the power switch OFF, and unplug the

instrument.
4 Open the front door and the panels on the right

and left, and remove panel F.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-21
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.6.2 Removing the High-Pressure Valve Rotor and Stator ASSY
1 Loosen all the male nuts at tubing connections

and remove the tubing from the housing. Remove
the needle seal.
When replacing only the rotor seal of the high-
pressure valve, it is not necessary to remove the
needle seal.
For details about how to remove the needle seal,
see
"8.2.1 Removing the Needle Seal" P. 8-6
Fig. 8.22
2 Loosen and remove the three hex socket head

bolts with the M4 Allen wrench.
Fig. 8.23
3 The high-pressure valve stator ASSY is composed

of a stator, a packing, and a stainless housing.
Grasp the housing and remove the ring and the
stator ASSY.
CAUTION
If the stator is not leveled, stator and rotor surface
may be damaged and it may cause the leakage.
8-22 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4 Grip the rotor securely, and pull it out of the

instrument.
NOTE
When handling the rotor, try to touch only the outer

circumference.
Fig. 8.24
5 Inspect the sliding surfaces of the rotor and the

stator for visible nicks or scratches.
Rotor
If the rotor or stator ASSY is damaged, replace the

parts.
If the rotor or stator is not damaged, wipe the
Check for
surface of rotor and stator using wiper paper
scratches
soaked with 2-propanol. Stator
ASSY
Fig. 8.25
6 If fouling is hard to remove, immerse the rotor and

8
the stator ASSY in 2-propanol and ultrasonically
clean them for 5 minutes.
Fig. 8.26
SIL-20A/20AC 8-23
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.6.3 Installing the High-Pressure Valve Rotor and the Stator ASSY
1 Align the notch in the rotor with the mark on the

shaft, and push the rotor all the way back onto the Shaft
shaft.
NOTE Alignment Mark
When handling the rotor, try to touch only the outer Rotor
circumference. After installing, wipe the sliding surface
with the stator using wiper paper soaked with 2- Notch
propanol.
Fig. 8.27
2 Install the ring.
NOTE
Take care not to have dust on the top and bottom

surfaces of the ring.
Ring
Fig. 8.28
3 Place the stator ASSY on the high-pressure valve

body, and lightly press the center of the housing
Lightly press
down
straight down with your finger so that the stator
ASSY is leveled.
4 With the stator ASSY pressed down, tighten three

hex socket head bolts gently with a longer leg of
an Allen wrench inserted to the sockets until the
bolt heads touch the ASSY. Gently tighten
the bolt until its
head touches
Stator ASSY the ASSY
NOTE
Fig. 8.29
Just before installing the stator ASSY, wipe the sliding
surface with soft cloth or paper soaked with 2-propanol.
8-24 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5 Tighten three hex socket head bolts 90° at a time

with the sequence of A, B, C using an Allen
C
wrench.
A
NOTE
B
Use a long leg of an Allen wrench as a handle to tighten
them securely.
Fig. 8.30
6 After securely tightening them, loosen the three

hex socket head bolts 90° at a time twice each C
(total of 180°) with the sequence of C, B, A, then
tighten them 90° each with the sequence of A, B,
C again.
Use the long leg
as a handle to
NOTE tighten bolts
securely.
Use a long leg of an Allen wrench as a handle to tighten
B
them securely. A
7 Restore the tubing of each port, the needle seal, Fig. 8.31
and the panel F to their original position.
8
CAUTION
If the stator is not leveled, stator and rotor surface
may be damaged and it may cause the leakage.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-25
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.6.4 Resetting the Usage Frequency
1 Check that there is a gap of approximately 3 mm

between the bottom side of the Z mount and the
tubings connected to the high-pressure valve.
2 Turn the power ON and press until the

Maintenance Information screen appears.
MAINTENANCE
Press func or VP
3 Press repeatedly until the [HPV SEAL

USED] screen on the right is displayed.
The usage frequency and replacement alert value HPV SEAL USED
of the high-pressure valve's rotor seal are 1/100000
displayed on the screen.
4 Press and
.
5 Press repeatedly until the [HPV

ROTATION] screen is displayed.
HPV ROTATION
Enter to Start
Pump 2-propanol at a rate of approximately
2 mL/min.
6 Press .
The high-pressure valve switches over
automatically once every few seconds. The
number of rotations remaining is displayed on the
second line.
NOTE
• When using a new rotor and stator, abrasion powder

may be generated initially. For this reason, perform the
steps 5. and 6.
• Once operation has started it cannot be stopped until
all 50 rotations have been completed. Abrasion
powder may be generated initially and so be sure to
remove the column before the operation.
8-26 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8 Close the door.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-27
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.7 Replacing Sample Loop
CAUTION
Carry out the replacement, process, and attachment of the sample loop correctly. Or, instrument capability
could be worsened or the life of sample loop could be shortened.
Necessary parts
Sample Loop ASSY 100 μL Consumable Part S228-45402-95 0.1 to 100 μL
Sample Loop ASSY 50 μL Consumable Part S228-45402-96 Option (0.1 to 50 μL)
Sample Loop ASSY 500 μL Consumable Part S228-45405-93 Option (0.1 to 500 μL)
Sample Loop ASSY 2 mL Consumable Part S228-45405-94 Option (0.1 to 2 mL)
Option (0.1 to 100 μL)

Inert Sample Loop Kit 100 μL*1 Consumable Part S228-61458-42
For Inert Kit for SIL-20A /20AC
Option (0.1 to 500 μL)

Inert Sample Loop Kit 500 μL*1 Consumable Part S228-45405-43
For Inert Kit for SIL-20A /20AC
*1 Replace the Inert Sample Loop Kit by reference to the included installation manual.
8.7.1 Before Removing the Sample Loop

ZHOME
Enter to Start
2 Press .
3 Turn the power switch OFF.
4 Unplug the instrument.
8-28 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.7.2 Removing the Sample Loop
1 Open the front door and remove panel F from the

autosampler.
2 Loosen the male nut at port 1 of the high-pressure

valve, which secures the sample loop and remove
it.
3 Unscrew and remove the three screws from the Z

mount cover, and remove the cover.
4 Using a wrench, unscrew and remove the male

nut on the other end of the sample loop (opposite
the needle).
SIL-20A/20AC 8-29
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
5 When using the A models, remove the sample

loop from the hooks (two places) at the right top of
for C model
the front section of the autosampler.

When using the C models, remove the sample
loop from the hooks (two places) on the back of
the front upper section of the plastic cover inside
the autosampler.
for A model
Fig. 8.32
6 Remove the sample loop from the hooks on the

left side of the autosampler's interior.
Fig. 8.33
7 Remove the sample loop from the hook of the

square hole at the back of the Z mount, and then
take the sample loop out of the autosampler.
Fig. 8.34
8-30 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.7.3 Installing the Sample Loop
1 Pass the new sample loop through the square

hole at the back of the Z mount, and insert it
through the positioning hook on the right side of
the Z mount.
2 Attach a male nut and a ferrule to the sample loop,

and secure to the joint on the needle side using a
spanner.
3 After attaching the part positioned with the sample

loop's band to the hook in the back on the left side
of the autosampler's interior, secure the sample
loop to the hooks at the center and front in
sequence.
Fixed potion of sample loop's band
Fig. 8.35
CAUTION
Check that the fixed portion of sample loop's band is
located lower and the sample loop do not hang
loosely behind the Z mount. If the sample loop hangs
loosely, It may be interfered with the instrument, and
broken. 8
4 When using the A models, attach the sample loop
to the hooks (two places) at the right top of the
front section of the autosampler.
When using the C models, attach the sample loop
to the hooks (two places) on the back of the front
upper section of the plastic cover inside the
autosampler.
5 Secure the sample loop, with the male nut and

ferrule attached, to port 1 of the high-pressure
valve.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-31
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
6 Adjust the plumbing for the sample loop attached

to port 1 in the way shown on the right.
Bend downwards along the high-pressure valve.
When using the C models, bend downwards along

the right side of the high-pressure valve and run it
along the right side of the resin cover.
7 Replace the Z mount cover, and tighten with its

screws.
8 Replace the panel F, and close the front door. Fig. 8.36
9 Reinsert the power plug and turn the power ON.
10 During initialization, open the panel at the top right

of the autosampler and make sure that there is no
interference between the sample loop and other
parts. In particular, make sure that there is no
interference between the port 1 of the high-
pressure valve and the bottom of the Z mount.
11 When sample loop ASSY 500 L (option) or

sample loop ASSY 2 mL (option) is installed,
change the maximum injection volume to 500 L
or 2000 L (default setting: 100 L) for [MAX Inj.
Volume] described in "[MAX Inj. Volume]"
P. 5-35.
When sample loop ASSY 50 L (option) is
installed, change the maximum injection volume to
50 L.
When sample loop ASSY 100 L (standard) is
reinstalled, reset the maximum injection volume to
100 L.
CAUTION
When using the 50 L sample loop ASSY, set
[SAMPLE SPEED] to 5 L/sec or less.
"[SAMPLE SPEED]" P. 5-22
If the speed is fast, the injection volume may not be
precise or may not be reproducible.
8-32 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.8 Inspecting (Replacing) and Ultrasonic Bath Cleaning of Suction Filter
8.8 Inspecting (Replacing) and Ultrasonic Bath

Cleaning of Suction Filter
Necessary parts
Part Type Part No.
Suction filter SUS Consumable part S228-45707-91
8.8.1 Removing the Suction Filter
Solvent tubing
3 Pull the suction filter out of the tubing.
4 Put the suction filter in a bath of 2-propanol, and

clean with an ultrasonic cleaning device for 5 Suction filter
minutes.
8
Fig. 8.37
SIL-20A/20AC 8-33
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.8.2 Installing the Suction Filter
1 Insert the suction filter back into the tubing.
2 Plug in the instrument.
5 Check that air bubbles do not accumulate inside

the solvent tubing.
If bubbles build up, remove the suction filter using
the above procedure and replace it with a new
one.
8-34 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.9 Replacing Needle
8.9 Replacing Needle

Necessary parts
Needle Coating 20A Consumable part S228-41024-93
Inert Needle 20A*1 Consumable Part S228-61561-41 For Inert Kit for SIL-20A /20AC
*1 Replace the Inert Needle by reference to the included installation manual.
8.9.1 Before Replacing the Needle

ZHOME
Enter to Start
2 Press .
8
8.9.2 Removing the Needle
1 Open the front door and remove front panel from

the autosampler.
2 Loosen the 3 mounting screws, and pull the Z

mount's cover forward to remove it.
3 Unscrew and remove the male nut of the needle

with a wrench.
Fig. 8.38
SIL-20A/20AC 8-35
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.9.3 Installing the Needle
1 Attach the male nut and the ferrule to a new

needle, finger-tighten the male nut, and further
turn it 180 degrees using a wrench.
CAUTION
• Insert the needle fully into the connection, then
tighten with a wrench. If the needle is not inserted
fully in the hole, a dead volume is created resulting
in peak diffusion or cross-contamination.
• Tighten the nut well. A loose fitting mary leak.
• Be sure to use the correct ferrule (Ferrule 1.2F)
that cones with the new needle. Using a normal
size ferrule (Ferrule 1.6F) may cause a leak.
2 Replace the Z mount cover, with its screws.
3 Reinstall the panel F.
4 Plug the instrument.
6 Open the autosampler's right cover, and check the

position at which the needle is lowered into the
injection port. Adjust the needle position if it is
incorrect.
NOTE
In the event that contamination increases after the

original needle is re-attached following maintenance,
replace the needle with a new one.
Fig. 8.39
8-36 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.10 Replacing Fuse
8.10 Replacing Fuse

WARNING
• Before replacing fuses, turn off the power and unplug the instrument.
• For replacement, only use fuses of the correct type and rating.
Failure to heed the above could result in fire, electric shock or short circuits.
The correct rating of the fuses is:
Necessary parts
Part Type Part No. Model name
• SIL-20A (S228-45006-31/41, -32/42, -38/48/58)

Fuse 218 3.15 Replacement part S072-02004-21 • SIL-20AHT (S228-45119--31/41, -32/42, -38/48/
58)
• SIL-20AC (S228-45007-31/41, -32/42, -38/48/

58)
Fuse 218 06.3 Replacement part S072-02004-24
• SIL-20ACHT (S228-45120-31/41, -32/42, -38/
48/58)
1 Turn the power OFF.

8
2 Remove the fuse holder at the back of the
autosampler using, for example, a flat-head
screwdriver. Fuse holder
Unscrew
Fig. 8.40
SIL-20A/20AC 8-37
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
3 Place new fuses into the fuse holder.
Fuse holder
4 Push the fuse holder in and fix by using a flat-head

screwdriver. New fuse
Screw and fix
Fig. 8.41
8-38 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.11 Replacing Panel F
8.11 Replacing Panel F

Necessary parts
20A Panel F Replacement part S228-50487-91 for A model
20AC Panel F Replacement part S228-50487-92 for C model
2 Open the door.
3 Loosen the panel mounting screws with a screw

driver, slide the panel right, and pull it forward to
detach it. Remove the panel F.
8
Fig. 8.42
4 Install a new panel F.
CAUTION
For C model, install the panel F securely.
Or, the condensation could be formed when air
enters the sample cooler.
5 Close the door.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-39
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.12 Replacing Rinsing Port Cap

Necessary parts
Rinsing port cap

When rinse solution contains highly-volatile acid
(without holes) Consumable part S228-48331-91
(Eg.: formic acid, TFA, acetic acid, etc.)
10 pieces per kit
When using other rinse solutions

Rinsing port cap
(Even when the above mentioned rinse solution is
(with holes) Consumable part S228-48331-92
used, use rinsing port caps with hole if there is a
10 pieces per kit
problem of cross-contamination.)
8.12.1 Before Replacing the Rinsing Port Cap

ZHOME
Enter to Start
2 Press .
The needle will go up to the top and move to the
center of the instrument.
4 Unplug the power plug from the outlet.
8.12.2 Replacing the Rinsing Port Cap
1 Remove the rinsing port cover from the rinsing

port.
8-40 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.12 Replacing Rinsing Port Cap
2 Remove the two caps on the rinsing port cover.
3 Install the new caps on the rinsing cover.
CAUTION
Fit the caps firmly all the way in. If they are loose,
they may touch the Z mount.
4 Restore the rinsing port cover to its original place. Fig. 8.43
CAUTION
Fit the cover firmly all the way in. If it is loose, it may
touch the Z mount.
5 Move the Z mount gently with your hand, and

make sure it does not touch the rinsing port cover.
(gap of 1 mm min)
8
6 Restore the panel F to its original place.
7 Put the power plug into the outlet.
9 Press the rinse key, and make sure the rinsing

is done without any problem. (gap of 1 mm min.)
Make sure there is a gap of 1 mm min.
Fig. 8.44
SIL-20A/20AC 8-41
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.13 Rinsing Flow Lines

If there is clogging inside the needle or the sample loop, or if there is contamination on the needle surface, the
inside and outside of the needle can be rinsed with the mobile phase.
8.13.1 Rinsing Needle and Sample Loop
1 Press CE to display the initial screen.
L:1.5ml-C/R:CntR
READY
2 Press repeatedly until the Maintenance

Information screen on the right is displayed.
MAINTENANCE
Press func or VP
3 Press repeatedly until the [NDLE

FLUSH] screen on the right is displayed.
NDLE FLUSH
4 Press on the pump.
Start pumping at 2 mL/min for 5 minutes and then
Enter to Start
stop pumping.
5 Press .
The screen on the right is displayed, the needle
NDLE is moving
moves to the rinsing port, and the high-pressure
valve switches to [INJ]. (The pump and the needle
become connected.)
FLUSHING READY
6 Pump mobile phase with the pump to wash away
any clogging or contamination in the needle.
Enter to Finish
NOTE
Replace the needle if it is not possible to remove the

clogging or the contamination.
"8.9 Replacing Needle" P. 8-35
7 When rinsing the inside of the needle is

completed, stop the pump by pressing .
8-42 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.13 Rinsing Flow Lines
8 Press .
The needle returns to the injection port.
8.13.2 Reverse Rinsing of the Flow Lines
NOTE
If clogging is observed in flow lines inside the autosampler, it may be possible to remove the clogging by
pumping with the inlet tubing and outlet tubing connected in reverse.
1 Disconnect the inlet tubing and the outlet tubing.

Identification mark (blue) is provided to the Inlet tubing tip.
2 Connect the outlet tubing to the solvent delivery module or mixer.

The mobile phase comes out of the inlet tubing. Collect the liquid with, for example, a beaker.
3 Pump 2-propanol into the autosampler from the solvent delivery module at 2-5 mL/min.
4 Return the plumbing to the original state.
Rinsing port
Measuring pump
8
Sample loop
2 1
Low-
3 pressure 5
valve
4
Manual syringe 2 1 Inlet tubing
Rinse solution
3 6 Solvent
delivery
5 module
Needle 4
Injection port
High-pressure Outlet tubing

valve
(Inject)
Fig. 8.45
SIL-20A/20AC 8-43
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.14 Replacing Outlet Tubing

CAUTION
Before replacing the clogged outlet tubing, first check the procedure "8.13.2 Reverse Rinsing of the Flow
Lines". If the clogs still remain after above action, replace the outlet tubing with a new one following the
procedure below. Also check "9.1.4 Prior to Plumbing" before replacement.
Necessary Parts
Part Part No. Model Remark
PEEK tubing, 0.25 ID × 1000 S228-43386-91 SIL-20A/20AC 0.25 mm ID, length 1000 mm
PEEK tubing, 0.13 ID × 1000 S228-40984-95 SIL-20A/20AC 0.13 mm ID, length 1000 mm
SUS tubing 0.3 ID × 1000 S228-46609-93 SIL-20AHT/20ACHT 0.3 mm ID, length 1000 mm
SUS tubing 0.17 ID × 1000 S228-46609-94 SIL-20AHT/20ACHT 0.17 mm ID, length 1000 mm
8.14.1 Before Removing the Outlet Tubing

ZHOME
Enter to Start
2 Press .
The needle will go up to the top and move to the
center of the instrument.
3 Turn the power switch OFF, and unplug the power

plug from the outlet.
4 Open the front door and right/left panels, and

remove panel F.
5 Remove the outlet tubing from the column.
6 Move the column oven to the right and make

space between autosampler and column oven.
8-44 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.14.2 Replacing the Outlet Tubing
[SIL-20A/20AC]

valve, and remove the outlet tubing.
Circular hole
on the side
Bend slightly Outlet tubing panel
2 Insert the PEEK outlet tubing into a circular hole

on the side panel of the instrument.
3 Mount a PEEK ferrule and a male nut at the end of

the tubing, and connect it to port No.5.
For the C models, pass the tubing through the
upper side of the "+" shaped slit on the plastic
cover.
NOTE
This should be connected firmly by hand. If the

connection is loose, the outlet tubing may come off and
Port No.5 Pass the tubing "+" shape slit
leakage may result.
through upper side
4 Slightly bend the outlet tubing so that it does not

touch the Z mount.
Fig. 8.46
CAUTION 8
Do not bend the tubing at a radius of 10 mm or
smaller. PEEK tubing may be broken.
5 Connect the other end of outlet tubing to the

column.
6 Return the panel F.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-45
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
[SIL-20AHT/20ACHT]

valve, and remove the outlet tubing.
Outlet tubing
Port No.5
Fig. 8.47
2 Stretch the round shape portion of the packed

outlet tubing as figure shows.
Fig. 8.48
3 Insert the outlet tubing (the end of tubing with ID

identification mark) into the round hole in the side
Outlet tubing
panel from the outside. ID identification

mark
Round hole of
Side panel
Fig. 8.49
8-46 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
4 Insert the outlet tubing into the round hole of left

side panel of column oven.
Outlet tubing Round hole of column oven
Slide the ID identification tag, if the tag interferes

with the hole. After inserting the tubing, slide the
tag to the original position.
CAUTION
Do not leave the tag in the column oven.
The tag may melt because of the high temperature.
ID identification tag
Fig. 8.50
5 Place a stainless ferrule and male nut to the outlet

tubing, and connect the tubing to port No. 5 using
Outlet tubing Plastic cover
a spanner.
For the C models, pass the tubing through the
upper side of the "+" shaped slit on the plastic
cover.
8
Port No.5 pass the tubing "+" shape slit
through upper side
6 Connect the other end of outlet tubing to the

column.
Fig. 8.51
7 Replace the panel F.
SIL-20A/20AC 8-47
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.15 Exterior Cleaning

If the instrument cover or front panel becomes dirty, wipe it clean with a soft dry cloth or tissue paper.
For persistent stains, clean the exterior using the following procedure.
1 Dip a piece of cloth in a dilute neutral detergent and twist firmly to remove excess liquid. Use this cloth
to scrub the soiled area of the exterior surface of the instrument.
2 Dip a piece of cloth into water and twist firmly to remove excess liquid. Use this cloth to wipe away all
the remaining detergent. Use a dry cloth to remove all moisture from the exterior surface of the
instrument.
CAUTION
Do not allow spilled water to remain on the instrument surface, and do not use alcohol or thinner-type
solvents to clean the surfaces. These can cause rusting and discoloration.
8-48 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8.16 Maintenance for Long Periods without Use
8.16 Maintenance for Long Periods

without Use
If the autosampler is not used for a long period, raise the needle to prevent a reduction in the service life of the
needle seal.
8.16.1 Moving the Needle
1 Turn the power ON.
ZHOME
Enter to Start
3 Press .
SIL-20A/20AC 8-49
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
8. Maintenance
8.17 Maintenance for Continuous Use

over Extended Periods
If the SIL-20AC series is used with the sample cooler set at a temperature lower than the room temperature,
dew condensation water may gather between the sample rack and the rack cooling plate.
In such a case, wipe the water as below.
1 From the initial screen, press

The [Z HOME] screen is displayed.
.
2 Press .
3 Remove the sample rack.
4 Remove the panel F.

"8.11 Replacing Panel F" P. 8-39
5 Wipe water off the rack cooling plate with soft cloth
or paper.
CAUTION
If your hand contacts the needle, you may sustain an
injury due to the tip of the needle.
6 Attach the panel F.
7 Mount the sample rack.
8 Press .
The needle moves back to the injection port.
8-50 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9 Technical Information
9
Contents
9.1 Installation ........................................................................................................ 9-2

9.2 Connection to External Input/Output Terminals.............................................. 9-26
9.3 Plumbing of the Autosampler ......................................................................... 9-28
9.4 Specifications ................................................................................................. 9-30
9.5 Maintenance Parts ......................................................................................... 9-34
9.6 Introduction to HPLC System......................................................................... 9-40
9.7 Mobile Phase Characteristics......................................................................... 9-41
9. Technical Information
9.1 Installation
9.1.1 Installation Site

 Suitable Sites and Preparation
To ensure safe operation, install the instrument in a suitable location that satisfies the following conditions.
WARNING
• Ample ventilation
The solvents used with the HPLC system are often flammable and toxic.
Therefore, the room where the instrument is installed must be well-ventilated.
• No fire sources used near the instrument
The solvents used with the HPLC are often flammable. Therefore, the use of open flame where the
instrument is installed must be strictly prohibited. Also, do not install in the same room with equipment
that emits or could potentially emit sparks.
• Fire extinguishers permanently available
Have fire extinguishers permanently available in case of fire.
• Protective equipment provided near the instrument
If solvent gets into the eyes or onto the skin, it must be flushed away immediately.
Provide equipment, such as eye wash stations and safety showers, as close to the instrument as
possible.
CAUTION
• Avoid dust or corrosive gas
To ensure a long service life of the instrument and preserve its performance levels, avoid installing it in
places subject to large amounts of dust or corrosive gas.
• Keep away from equipment generating strong magnetic fields
To ensure proper operation, do not install the instrument in places subject to strong magnetic fields.
If the power supply line is subject to high electrical noise, install a surge protector.
• Install the instrument in the location that satisfies the following conditions to preserve the
performance:
• room temperature is between 4 and 35 C, with minimal temperature variation through a day.
• air currents from heating or air conditioning equipment are not directed on the instrument.
• sunlight does not shine directly on the instrument.
• there is no vibration.
• humidity stays within 20 - 85%.
• place without condensation
9-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
 Required Installation Space
CAUTION
• The weight of A models is approx. 27 kg and C models approx. 30 kg.
During installation, consider the entire weight combined with other LC components.
The lab table on which this instrument is installed should be strong enough to support the total weight of
the LC system. It should be level, stable and have depth of at least 600 mm.
If these precautions are not followed, the instrument could tip over or fall off the table.
• Keep at least 100 mm between the rear of the instrument and the wall.
This allows for sufficient air circulation to provide cooling and prevent the instrument from overheating
and impairing the performance.
Typical system configurations and required installation spaces are shown in the figures below.
 High-pressure gradient system with autosampler
(Unit: mm)
Fig. 9.1
SIL-20A/20AC 9-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1.2 Installation
 Removing the Shipping Bracket
When shipped, the autosampler drive is secured with the fixing bracket and screws. After the installation,
remove the screws and the fixing bracket. Also, remove an elastic cap from the injection port.
1 Open the door.
Fig. 9.2
3 Loosen the screw using an Allen wrench and

remove the bracket.
NOTE
The screw and bracket may be required again when

transporting the autosampler and so be sure not to lose
them.
Fixing bracket
Fig. 9.3
4 Remove the protective septum attached to the

needle tip.
5 Remove the protective rubber cap from the

injection port.
9-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
6 Install caps on the rinsing port cover.
Fig. 9.4
CAUTION
• There are two types of caps included, ones with a
hole and ones without. When you use highly
volatile acid, such as formic acid, TFA, and acetic
acid, as the rinse solution, volatile constituent may
corrode metal parts in the instrument. Install caps
properly following the guideline below. Also, after
you complete the analysis, replace the rinse
solution with less volatile and less corrosive liquid
such as water, and ventilate the autosampler.
Rinsing port S228-48331-91 Use when rinse

cap (without solution contains
holes) highly-volatile acids
(Eg.: formic acid,
TFA, acetic acid, etc.)
Rinsing port
cap (with
S228-48331-92 Use when using other
rinse solutions
9
holes) (Even when the
above mentioned
rinse solution is used,
use rinsing port caps
with hole if there is a
problem of cross-
contamination.)
• Fit the caps firmly all the way in. If they are loose,
they may touch the Z mount.
SIL-20A/20AC 9-5
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
7 Fit the rinsing port cover firmly into the rinsing

port. Move the Z mount gently with your hand, and
make sure it does not touch the rinsing port cover
(gap of 1 mm min.).
Make sure there is a gap of 1 mm min.
Fig. 9.5
8 Replace the panel F.
9 Close the door.
Fig. 9.6
9-6 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
 Installation
The SIL-20A is designed for stacking with other Shimadzu HPLC components.
"9.6 Introduction to HPLC System" P. 9-40
CAUTION
There is only a 5 mm gap at the bottom of the
autosampler.
Take care not to catch your fingers in the modules.
NOTE
Always install this instrument on the left side of the

column oven.
 Stacking Brackets
The use of commercially available stacking brackets is
recommended. These brackets limit the possibility of the
instrument falling off the lab table during an earthquake
or the like. Various grades of stacking brackets are
available.
Safety
bracket
Fasten the instrument firmly in place by attaching
stacking brackets to both the right and left sides.
For more details, contact your Shimadzu representative.
Safety
An example of stacking bracket placement is shown in bracket
"Fig. 9.7".
9
. Fig. 9.7
SIL-20A/20AC 9-7
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1.3 Power Supply Connection

The following table shows the electrical voltage, power consumption, and frequency.
SIL-20A
Part No. Frequency
S228-45006-31
AC100 V  10% (100 V)
S228-45006-41
S228-45006-32
AC110 - 120 V  10% (110 - 120 V)
S228-45006-42
100 VA 50/60 Hz 35 A
S228-45006-36
S228-45006-38
S228-45006-46 AC220 - 240 V  10% (220 - 240 V)
S228-45006-48
S228-45006-58
SIL-20AC
Part No. Frequency
S228-45007-31
AC100 V  10% (100 V)
S228-45007-41
S228-45007-32
AC110 - 120 V  10% (110 - 120 V)
S228-45007-42
300 VA 50/60 Hz 63 A
S228-45007-36
S228-45007-38
S228-45007-46 AC220 - 240 V  10% (220 - 240 V)
S228-45007-48
S228-45007-58
9-8 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
SIL-20AHT
Part No. Frequency
S228-45119-31
AC100 V  10% (100 V)
S228-45119-41
S228-45119-32
AC110 - 120 V  10% (110 - 120 V)
S228-45119-42
100 VA 50/60 Hz 35 A
S228-45119-36
S228-45119-38
S228-45119-46 AC220 - 240 V  10% (220 - 240 V)
S228-45119-48
S228-45119-58
SIL-20ACHT
Part No. Frequency
S228-45120-31
AC100 V  10% (100 V)
S228-45120-41
S228-45120-32
AC110 - 120 V  10% (110 - 120 V)
S228-45120-42
300 VA 50/60 Hz 63 A
S228-45120-36
S228-45120-38
S228-45120-46 AC220 - 240 V  10% (220 - 240 V)
S228-45120-48
S228-45120-58
9
Verify that the power outlet to be used for connection has sufficient capacity. If capacity is insufficient, a power
outage or voltage drop can occur, affecting not only this instrument, but other instruments connected to the
same power supply.
SIL-20A/20AC 9-9
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Connecting to the Power Outlet
WARNING
Handle the power cord with care, and observe the
following precautions to avoid cord damage, fire,
electric shock or instrument malfunction.
• Do not place heavy objects on the cord.
• Keep hot items away from the cord.
• Do not modify the cord.
• Do not bend the cord excessively or pull on it.
• To unplug the instrument, pull the plug itself, NOT
the cord.
If the cord is damaged, replace it immediately.
Fig. 9.8
CAUTION
Before plugging in the instrument, make sure that the
power switch is OFF.
Power cord connector
1 Insert the connector side of the power cord into

the power cord connector at the back of the
instrument. Connector side
2 Insert the plug side of the power cord into the

power supply outlet. Plug side
Connect to Power outlet
Fig. 9.9
 Grounding
WARNING
To prevent electric shock and to maintain stability in
operation of the product, be sure to ground the
product.
The product will be grounded when the provided
3-wired power plug is inserted into a 3-wired power
socket equipped with a ground terminal.
9-10 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
9.1.4 Prior to Plumbing

Many different types of tubings and connectors are used to plumb the instrument at installation. It is necessary
to cut tubings and mount connectors prior to the plumbing. In this section, instructions and precautions for
these preparations are described.
 Types of Tubings and Connectors

The tubing and connectors used for the plumbing are made of stainless steel (SUS) or resin as follows.
Stainless steel (SUS) Resin

• Stainless steel tubing 1.6 mm OD  0.3 mm ID • FEP tubing, PTFE tubing, ETFE tubing, PEEK tubing,
• Stainless steel tubing 1.6 mm OD  0.17 mm ID PE tubing, etc.
• Male nuts, 1.6 MN • Male nuts PEEK
• Male nuts, 1.6 MN, W6 • PEEK ferrules
• Ferrules 1.6F • PTFE ferrules
CAUTION
When resin tubing is used, pumping with the pressure of 20 MPa or higher may cause tubing come off at
the connection. Be sure to use this instrument with the pressure of 20 MPa or less.
 Cutting the Tubings

Cut provided tubing to the proper lengths for installation.
Cutting Stainless Steel Tubings
1 Position the provided file (for cutting stainless

steel tubing) diagonally against the tubing, and cut
stainless steel tubing
9
up around the tubing.
NOTE
Cut up the tubing so that the cut surface is at a right

angle.
Fig. 9.10
SIL-20A/20AC 9-11
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2 Holding the tubing at equal distances from the

cutting up line, bend it up and down and from side
to side to cut off.
3 File the cut surface to make smooth and straight.
Fig. 9.11
CAUTION
• Make the cut surface at right angle. Otherwise,
dead volume will be created and may cause
chromatographic peak broadening.
• Make sure that the inner diameter of the tubing is
not deformed. Otherwise, the tubing may be
clogged.
Cutting Resin Tubings

Cut off the resin tubing at a right angle using a cutter.
Resin tubing
Cut at right angle
Fig. 9.12
9-12 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
 Connecting the Tubings

1 Mount a male nut and a ferrule to the tubing.
Tubing
CAUTION Male nut
Install stainless steel male nuts and ferrules on

stainless steel tubing. If install resin male nuts and
Ferrule
ferrules on stainless steel tubing, the tubing will be
easy to remove and the leakage may occur.
However, stainless steel male nuts and dedicate
resin ferrules of the male nut fitting can install on
stainless steel tubing.
Fig. 9.13
"Male Nut Fitting (SIL-20AHT/20ACHT)" P. 9-14
2 Insert the end of the tubing, with the ferrule on it,

into the appropriate opening. Then tighten the
male nut. Perpendicular
The ferrule will be secured on the tubing.
CAUTION
• Insert the tubing completely into the opening, until
it butts against the end of the opening.
Otherwise, dead volume will be created and may
cause chromatographic peak broadening.
• Do not overtighten the male nut.
Otherwise, the threads will be damaged.
Fig. 9.14
9
NOTE
Use the following as rough guide for the degree of tightening to tighten a male nut with a spanner when
connecting the PEEK tubing with an SUS ferrule and a male nut.
Use the following as rough guide for the degree of tightening required to tighten the male nut with a spanner.
• 6-mm male nut: Tighten securely by hand and tighten another 120 (approx.) with a spanner.
• 8-mm male nut: Tighten securely by hand and tighten another 90 (approx.) with a spanner.
After connecting the PEEK tubing, pull the tubing to check that it does not come out.
SIL-20A/20AC 9-13
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
NOTE
• For an stainless steel male nut: Male nut

Use the open-end wrench (provided) to tighten and
loosen the nut.
If the nut is to be connected to a union or other part
that is not secured, use a second wrench to secure the
union.
• For a resin male nut, male nut fitting (For SIL-20AHT/

20ACHT):
Tighten and loosen the nut by hand. Coupling
Fig. 9.15
3 Loosen and move the male nut a slightly, to verify

that the ferrule is secured to the tubing.
Moves
Does not move
Fig. 9.16
 Male Nut Fitting (SIL-20AHT/20ACHT)

Can be used to make a finger-tight connection between the stainless steel outlet tubing to the column. (up to
35 MPa)
CAUTION
• When pumping at a high pressure exceeding 20 MPa is required, hold the column with the supplied
spanner while connecting the stainless outlet tubing to the column and tighten the male nut firmly by
fingers.
• PEEK fittings other than male nut fitting (S228-48458-91) cannot be used when pumping is done with
the pressure over 20 MPa because tubing may come off and the solvent may splash.
In case of pumping tetrahydrofuran (THF), chloroform, etc. used by GPC analysis, do not use it. PEEK
ferrules are transformed, and the leakage may occur.
9-14 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
 Protective Plugs
Inlets and outlets of the instrument are fitted with protective plugs (bushings, stop plugs, caps and similar
items) to keep out dirt and dust during shipment.
When the instrument is not connected to other LC system components, replace the protective plugs.
Otherwise, dirt and dust may cause clogging of the instrument.
Keep the plugs, and replace them when the instrument will be left not in use for a long time.
NOTE
• For stop plugs:

Use the wrench provided to unscrew and screw in the plugs.
• For resin plugs:
Remove and replace the plugs by hand.
CAUTION
Bending the Tubing
[Stainless steel tubing]
Do not bend stainless steel tubing at a sharp angle using a plier. This may cause the tubing to clog or the
pressure inside the tubing to increase. Do not bend and stretch the tubing at the same point repeatedly.
This may cause a broken tubing.
[PEEK tubing]
Do not bend PEEK tubing at a radius of 10 mm or smaller. This may cause a broken tubing.
SIL-20A/20AC 9-15
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1.5 Plumbing
CAUTION
• Before plumbing, turn OFF the power supply to all the system components and unplug them.
• For plumbing, use the appropriate parts listed in "1.4 Component Parts".
• Connect only the tubing described in the instructions.
Otherwise, injury or equipment failure may cause.
The necessary plumbing is as follows:

• Inlet tubing plumbing
Connects the instrument to the pump or mixer.
(Becomes part of mobile phase flow line.)
• Outlet tubing plumbing
Connects the instrument to column. (Becomes flow
line for sample solvent and sample.)
• Solvent filter plumbing
Connected to rinse solution container (Becomes flow
line for rinse solution, between rinse solution container
and drain valve.)
• Rinse solution drain plumbing
Drains rinse solution from the rinsing port.
• Water condensation drain tubing plumbing
(only for C models)
Drains water condensation from the sample cooler.
• Leakage drain tubing plumbing
If leakage occurs in any of the system devices, this
tubing directs leakage to a waste container.
Fig. 9.17
 Rinse Solution and Waste Container Preparation

Prepare the rinse solution and waste containers before connecting the plumbing.
WARNING
Do not use cracked or damaged waste container(s). They could be broken.
CAUTION
The waste container must be positioned lower than the instrument (for example, on the floor).
If it is positioned higher than the instrument, liquid will not drain, and will leak from the connections.
9-16 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
 Plumbing the Inlet/Outlet Tubing

The inlet tubing and the outlet tubing are connected, respectively, to port No. 6 and port No. 5 of the high-
pressure valve. Instructions for plumbing these connections are given below.
Inlet tubing
The inlet tubing is connected to the outlet port at the pump or at the mixer.
NOTE
The Inlet tubing is added the identification mark (blue) at the tip of the tubing. When the tubing will be long at
installation, cut the inlet tubing.
NOTE
The inlet tubing is connected to the pump outlet in an isocratic system, and to the mixer in a gradient system.
(For details, see the instruction manual for the pump or column oven.)
Outlet tubing
The outlet tubing is connected to the column.
Refer to "9.3 Plumbing of the Autosampler" for information on how to select inner diameter of tubing to be
used.
CAUTION
Cut the outlet tubing to suitable length. ID identification mark (white) attach on the outlet tubing (0.17 mm
ID).
SIL-20A/20AC 9-17
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Plumbing between Outlet Tubing and Column

1 Unscrew and remove the stop plug from the
column inlet.
Column outlet
Stop plug
Column
Stop plug
Column inlet
Fig. 9.18
2 Connect the outlet tubing into the column inlet.
NOTE
In case of SIL-20AHT/20ACHT, connect the outlet tubing

using male nut fitting.
Outlet tubing
Column inlet
Male nut
fitting
Inlet tubing
Fig. 9.19
9-18 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
 Plumbing the Rinse Solution Drain Tubing (standard accessory)
CAUTION
The volume of waste liquid produced per analysis is
about 200 µL, under default conditions (default
values). If a large number of samples is analyzed
continuously, provide a larger waste container. If the
container is too small, it will overflow.
1 Attach the drain tubing (provided) etc. as in the

right figure.
(When the waste liquid is a solution such as water,
buffer, alcohol like as methanol or etc. and
Normally, connect the tubings as in "Fig. 9.20". If acetonitrile and so on.)
the rinse solution with low polarity is used,
however, connect the tubings as in "Fig. 9.21".
The numbers in the figures correspond to the ones
on P.1-8.
CAUTION
Be careful not to bend or jackknife the drain tubing.
If the tubing is bent, inside of the tubing may collapse
and liquid leak from the rinsing port may occur.
23 L-type drain tubing

(Only SIL-20AC)
24 L-type drain tubing
(Only SIL-20A)
22 Clamp
11 Drain tubing, Silicon

9
20 Drain tubing Adapter
10 PTFE tubing (8 mm OD)
The numbers are from the list on P.1-8
Fig. 9.20
SIL-20A/20AC 9-19
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
2 Adjust the length of the silicone tubing by cutting it

with a cutter so that it extends to the waste
(When the waste liquid contains a polar solvent
such as chloroform, tetrahydrofuran (THF) or etc.)
container inlet. In case of plumbing in "Fig. 9.21",
insert the PTFE tubing (part No. 9) into the drain
tubing adapter directly.
3 Attach the drain tubing adapter to the drain bottle

inlet.
CAUTION
The end of the drain tubing must not be submerged
into the waste liquid. Waste liquid will leak from the
rinsing port. If necessary, tape the tubing to the
container's rim to prevent submersion.
13 Drain
tubing ASSY
(ETFE)
11 Drain tubing, Silicone
9 PTFE tubing (7 mm OD)
20 Drain tubing adapter
The numbers are from the list on P.1-8
Fig. 9.21
9-20 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
9.1.6 Tubing Example for High-Pressure Gradient System

The figure below shows an example of tubing at the high-pressure gradient system. Install the tubing as
shown in the figure.
1
9
Fig. 9.22
NOTE
Use the stainless tubing (1) connected to the No. 4 port of the low-pressure valve and the tubing parts
attached to the degassing unit (DGU-20A) for connection.
SIL-20A/20AC 9-21
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1.7 Wiring
WARNING
• Before performing wiring, turn OFF all components and unplug the power cables.
• Do not use any other than specified cables for wiring.
• Do not perform any other than the indicated wiring operations.
Failure to observe the above cautions could result in fire, electric shock or malfunction to the instrument.
 Connecting the Optical Cable

The optical cable provided with this instrument is a two-way assembly for both transmission and reception of
signals, and is connected to the [REMOTE] connector.
Instructions and precautions for connecting the optical cable are provided below.
1 Before connection, remove the cap from the

connection channel to be used.
CAUTION
The caps on the [REMOTE] connectors prevent dirt
or dust from getting into the connector.
If a [REMOTE] connector is not used, leave the cap
on it to prevent dirt or dust from interfering with
communication.
When a cap is removed, keep it in a safe place for
future use. Cap [REMOTE] connector
Fig. 9.23
2 Insert the optical cable plug into the [REMOTE]

terminal so that it clicks into place.
Blue
CAUTION Gray
• Make sure there is no dirt or dust on the plug.

Dirt or dust on the plug will get inside the Plug
[REMOTE] connector.
• Be careful not to insert the plug across two Insert until it clicks.
different channels.
Failure to follow these precautions above could
result in malfunction or communication problems.
Fig. 9.24
9-22 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
CAUTION
• Do not bend the optical cable less than 35 mm in
radius.
• When inserting and removing the plug, grip the
plug itself, not the cable.
• Do not bend the cable where it joins the plug.
Failure to follow these above precautions could
result in damage to the plug or a broken wire in the
cable.
Fig. 9.25
 Connection to System Controller

Referring to "Connecting the Optical Cable" P. 9-22, use the optical cable to connect the auto injector
[REMOTE] terminal to the system controller's Channel 1 (SIL) [REMOTE] terminal.
9.1.8 Installation of Optional Equipment

For details (types and part Nos.) on the options described below, refer to "1.5 Optional Parts" P. 1-11.
 Sample Rack and Vials

Procedures for installing the sample rack and loading vials are given in "4.1 Preparing the Samples" P. 4-2.
9.1.9 Transporting the Instrument
9
Perform the following process before transporting this instrument.
For details on changing the needle position, refer to "[Z HOME]" P. 5-33.

ZHOME
Enter to Start
2 Press .
SIL-20A/20AC 9-23
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
5 Open the door, and remove the sample racks.
Fig. 9.26

Panel F
Fig. 9.27
7 Fix the fixing bracket with screws using an Allen

wrench to lock up the Z mount.
CAUTION
Be careful not to bend the needle while using the
screwdriver and Allen wrench.
Fixing bracket
Fig. 9.28
8 Attach the needle protection septum to the hole of

the vial detection block.
9-24 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.1 Installation
9 Remove the rinsing port cover.
10 Put an elastic cap on the injection port, install the

panel F, and close the door.
11 Move the instrument.
9.1.10 Installation of Ambient Temperature Sensor (Only C Models)

If the temperature fluctuation will be large, use the clamp (No.25 of the component parts) to secure the
ambient temperature sensor cable at a location near the instrument with minimal temperature fluctuation.
Tip of ambient
temperature sensor
Clamp
9
Ambient
temperature
sensor
Fig. 9.29
NOTE
If the tip of the ambient temperature sensor touches the instrument's rear cover, the sensor cannot correctly
sense the temperature.
SIL-20A/20AC 9-25
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.2 Connection to External Input/Output

Terminals
The external input/output terminals are connected to an event output device or another external device with a
provided event cable.
Details of the terminal and wiring are described as follows.
CAUTION
• Before connecting the cable, turn off the power and unplug the instrument.
• Use only the specified cable.
• Connect as specified.
Otherwise, fire, electric shock or malfunction may occur.
9.2.1 Event Cable
Signals Description Remark
START (output) Relay contact output. Switches ON/OFF when the autosampler starts
(injected) analysis.
EVENT1 (output) Relay contact output. Output switched by [EVENT] setting.

Contact rating:
EVENT2 (output) Relay contact output. Output switched by [EVENT] setting.
30VDC/1A
EVENT3/ERROR Relay contact output or error output.
(output) Output switched by [EVENT] setting.
RSVD For factory adjustment. Not used.
When this contact is closed, the autosampler becomes ready to start

injection operation.
READY (input)
Used to start injection operation in synchronization with external
devices.
STOP (input) Injection operation stops when this contact is closed.
CHANGER Connected when using a Rack Changer II.
9-26 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.2 Connection to External Input/Output Terminals
9.2.2 Connection of Event Cable
1 Peel the cable about 10 mm.

 This is not required with the remote cable
provided.
2 Insert the cable.

When the cable has the single core wire, just
Fig. 9.30
insert the cable.

When the cable has the stranded wires, strand the
wires enough and insert with pressing the button
of the terminal.
When removing the cable, remove the cable by
pressing the button of the terminal.
NOTE
The instrument supplies one event cable. When more than 2 cables are required, use the following cables.
• Cable with single wire:  0.4 to  1.2 (AWG26 to 16)
• Cable with stranded wire: 0.3 mm2 to 1.25 mm2 (AWG22 to 16), diameter of single wire thicker than  0.18.
The cable with stranded wire is suitable to prevent disconnection.
9
SIL-20A/20AC 9-27
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.3 Plumbing of the Autosampler

The following table shows attached tubing that can be connected to the outlet tubing. This section describes
how to select the tubing. Select the desired tubing according to the following description.
Standard tubing Accessory tubing
SIL-20A/20AC
0.13 mm ID, PEEK tubing
(Standard: 0.25 mm ID, PEEK tubing)
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
(Standard: 0.3 mm ID, stainless steel 0.17 mm ID, stainless steel tubing
tubing)
9.3.1 Notes on the Inner Diameter of tubing

 Effects of Tubing on Chromatographic Resolution
Sample diffusion in tubing after the autosampler affects the chromatogram. The longer the tubing is and the
bigger its inner diameter is, the bigger sample diffusion becomes and the worse peak separation on the
chromatogram is. This impact of the diffusion on chromatogram varies depending on the NTP (number of
theoretical plates) of the used column, mobile phase flow rate, and peak retention time. Especially, use of a
column of large NTP, analysis with low mobile phase flow rate, and the peak with early retention time are
affected very much.
 Guideline to Select Tubing

To help select the right tubing, the effect of sample diffusion in tubing on chromatogram is shown in table
format regarding the tubing that comes with the autosampler SIL-20AHT/20ACHT. This table shows the NTP
(number of theoretical plates) of chromatogram in Isocratic analysis with the effect of sample diffusion in
tubing added and its ratio against the NTP with no diffusion in tubing (12,000). Compare this table with your
actual analysis conditions, and use this information as reference for the selection of tubing.
9-28 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.3 Plumbing of the Autosampler
NTP on chromatogram and their ratio (column NTP: 12,000)

• Tubing: 0.3 mm ID, 1,000 mm in length (standard stainless steel tubing)
Retention time (min)
1 2 5 10 20
NTP 211 803 3714 7703 10532

0.2
Ratio 1.8% 6.7% 31.0% 64.2% 87.8%
Flow rate NTP 1209 3714 8843 11017 11738

0.5
(mL/min) Ratio 10.1% 31.0% 73.7% 91.8% 97.8%
NTP 3714 7703 11017 11738 11933

1.0
Ratio 31.0% 64.2% 91.8% 97.8% 99.4%
• Tubing: 0.17 mm ID, 1,000 mm in length (attached stainless steel tubing)
Retention time (min)
1 2 5 10 20
NTP 1225 3752 8877 11030 11742

0.2
Ratio 10.2% 31.3% 74.0% 91.9% 97.8%
Flow rate NTP 4985 8877 11361 11834 11958

0.5
(mL/min) Ratio 41.5% 74.0% 94.7% 98.6% 99.6%
NTP 8877 11030 11834 11958 11989

1.0
Ratio 74.0% 91.9% 98.6% 99.6% 99.9%
9.3.2 General Guidelines for Changing the Plumbing

After checking the items described in "6.2.1 Causes and Countermeasures against Clogging" P. 6-8,
determine whether or not replacement is necessary by considering the application.
9
In the following examples no problem arises if the tubing is the 0.3 mm ID tubing, because use of plumbing of
small diameters has little advantage in such cases.
 When a Manual Injector Is Connected Downstream from this Instrument

In this case, band broadening due to plumbing matters little, because usually conventional columns (4.6 -
6 mm ID or more) are used.
 When only Columns of Wide Bore (6 mm ID or More) Are Used

In this case, the plumbing contributes little to band broadening, and it has little influence to analysis data.
 When Analysis Through-put has Priority over Protection of Columns from Clogging (i.e.
Sample Filtration)
When column clogging from particles in samples is acceptable to the customer, due to situations such that a
massive amount of samples should be analyzed in a short time, use of wide bore plumbing helps minimize
equipment downtime due to clogged tubing.
SIL-20A/20AC 9-29
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.4 Specifications
9.4.1 Sample Injection
Item Specification
Injection system Variable injection volume type (zero sample loss during injection)
0.1 to 100 µL (standard), 1 to 2000 µL (optional)

Injection volume setting range
(0.1 to 0.9 µL in 0.1 µL increments, 1 to 2000 µL in 1 µL increments)
175 (w/1 mL vials), 105 (w/1.5 mL vials),

50 (w/4 mL vials),
192 (w/2 microtiter plates each with 96 wells),
Number of samples processed
768 (w/2 microtiter plates each with 384 wells),
192 (w/2 deep-well plate each with 96 wells),
768 (w/2 deep-well plate each with 384 wells)
1.5 mL glass, 1.1 mL glass, 1 mL glass, 4 mL glass,

0.3 mL glass (w/stainless spacers), 0.3 mL glass (4 mL vial storage type),
Vials 1 mL plastic, 0.2 mL plastic, 4 mL plastic,
96-well microtiter plate, 384-well microtiter plate, 96-deep well, 384-deep
well
Injection volume repeatability RSD  0.3% (at 10 µL injection)
Less than 0.005%

Carryover
(using specified analysis conditions)
Injection volume accuracy 1% (at 50 µL injection, n = 10)
Number of repeat injections 1 - 30 times/sample
Analysis time setting 0.01 minute steps (< 1000 minutes), 0.1 minute steps (> 1000 minutes)
Number of sample table steps 100 steps max
Sample aspiration rate 0.1-15 µL/sec (0.1 µL/sec increments)
Rinse aspiration rate Variable (1 to 35 µL/sec, 1 µL/increments)
Maximum SIL-20A/20AC 20 MPa

allowable pressure SIL-20AHT/20ACHT 35 MPa
9-30 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.4 Specifications
9.4.2 Sample Cooler (Only C Models)
Item Specification
Direct cooling system (environment conditions: room temperature below 30 C with humidity less
System
than 70% when the cooler temperature is set to 4 C), dehumidification function included
Range to set 4 to 40 C (Room temperature needs to be 30 C or lower and the humidity 70% or less to go down
temperature to 4 C.)
Temperature
3 C (6 C for microtiter plate and deep well plate. Not cooled below 1 C.)
accuracy
9.4.3 Others
Item Specification
Stainless steel (SUS316L, SUS316), ceramic, PTFE, ETFE, FEP, GFP, sapphire,
Liquid contact materials
PEEK, Vespel (option)
Ambient temperature 4-35 C Cooling down to 4 C is possible at a room temperature of 30 C,

Humidity range 20-85% humidity of 70% or lower.
pH range 1-14 (standard), 1-9 (When Vespel needle seal is used)
Dimensions W260  H415  D500 mm
SIL-20A
SIL-20AHT 27 kg
(A models)
Mass
SIL-20AC
SIL-20ACHT
(C models)
30 kg
9
SIL-20A/20AC 9-31
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Specification
Power Supply
Item Rated
Voltage Power
Part No. Frequency Breaking
(indicated on the Consumption
Capacity*2
instrument)*1
S228-45006-31 AC100 V  10%

S228-45006-41 (100 V)
S228-45006-32 AC110 - 120 V  10%

S228-45006-42 (110 - 120 V)
SIL-20A 100 VA 50/60 Hz 35 A
S228-45006-36
S228-45006-38
AC220 - 240 V  10%
S228-45006-46
(220 - 240 V)
S228-45006-48
S228-45006-58
S228-45007-31 AC100 V  10%

S228-45007-41 (100 V)
S228-45007-32 AC110 - 120 V  10%

S228-45007-42 (110 - 120 V)
SIL-20AC 300 VA 50/60 Hz 63 A
S228-45007-36
S228-45007-38
AC220 - 240 V  10%
S228-45007-46
(220 - 240 V)
S228-45007-48
S228-45007-58
Power supply
S228-45119-31 AC100 V  10%
S228-45119-41 (100 V)
S228-45119-32 AC110 - 120 V  10%

S228-45119-42 (110 - 120 V)
SIL-20AHT 100 VA 50/60 Hz 35 A
S228-45119-36
S228-45119-38
AC220 - 240 V  10%
S228-45119-46
(220 - 240 V)
S228-45119-48
S228-45119-58
S228-45120-31 AC100 V  10%

S228-45120-41 (100 V)
S228-45120-32 AC110 - 120 V  10%

S228-45120-42 (110 - 120 V)
SIL-20ACHT 300 VA 50/60 Hz 63 A
S228-45120-36
S228-45120-38
AC220 - 240 V  10%
S228-45120-46
(220 - 240 V)
S228-45120-48
S228-45120-58
9-32 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.4 Specifications
Item Specification
Installation Category II
Pollution Degree 2
Installation Environment (IEC)
Altitude 2000 m or lower
Install inside the room.
Error display Exists (Error display and stop at the time of malfunction)
SIL-20A/20AC 9-33
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.5 Maintenance Parts
9.5.1 Consumable Parts
Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
Part Part No. 3 SIL-20A Series Remark
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
NEEDLE SEAL, PEEK 20A S228-42325-01 5
Vespel needle seal S228-48258-91 4 Optional (for GPC analysis)
Plunger seal S228-35145 3
Low-pressure valve rotor S228-36923 3
High-pressure valve rotor S228-41310-92 5
Sample loop ASSY S228-45402-95 3 For 100 L injection
SUCTION FILTER, SUS S228-45707-91 3
Needle Coating 20A S228-41024-93 3
Set of 10 rinsing port caps

Rinsing port cap set (without holes) S228-48331-91 3
(228-47973-01)
Set of 10 rinsing port caps

Rinsing port cap set (with holes) S228-48331-92 3
(228-47973-02)
Vial detection spring S034-01615-09 3
9.5.2 Replacement Parts

 Fuse
Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
Fuse, 218 3.15 S072-02004-21 3
Fuse, 218 06.3 S072-02004-24 3
9-34 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Autosampler Base Parts

Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
20A panel F S228-50487-91 3 A models
20AC panel F S228-50487-92 3 C models
 Valve ASSY
Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
Stator HPV ASSY S228-45408-91 6 For SIL-20A/20AC
Stator HPV ASSY S228-45408-93 4 For SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Measuring pump plunger S228-35010-91 3
Stator, 5PV S228-36917-01 3
Packing, 5PV S228-38654 3
9
 Tubing Parts
Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
Ferrule S228-16000-10 3
Male Nut, 1.6MN S228-16001-03 3
Male Nut, 1.6MN, W6 S228-16001-03 3
SUS tubing, ID 0.3  1000 S228-46609-93 4 For SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
SUS tubing, ID 0.17  1000 S228-46609-94 2 For SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
SIL-20A/20AC 9-35
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
ferrule  2PC, male nut 

Male nut fitting S228-45717-01 4
2PC of 228-48485-91
Fitting set 20A (1PC) S228-45407-91 3 For HPV
Fitting set 20A (5PC) S228-45407-92 6 For HPV
Male Nut 1.6MN (PEEK) S228-18565 6
PEEK tubing, 0.25 ID  1000 mm S228-43386-91 6 With tubing protection
PEEK tubing, 0.25 ID S228-32999-01 6 Order by the m
PEEK tubing, 0.13 ID S228-32999-03 6 Order by the m
 Service Tools
Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
Syringe Needle, Lock S046-00002 3
Needle ASSY Syringe S228-18216-91 3
Syringe, L-208 S046-00038-01 3
Syringe, Adapter S228-15672-91 3
Spanner 6  8 S086-03047-01 3
Spanner 8  10 S086-03047-06 3
Tool for needle seal XR S228-50570 2
Jig rack teaching S228-50895 3
Allen wrench, 3 mm S086-03804 3
Allen wrench, 4 mm S086-03805 3
Seal Installation Tool S228-25142-01 3
Plunger Tool S228-34672-02 3
9-36 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Others
Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
Control vial rack cover S228-45417-91 3
1.5 mL cooling rack cover S228-50759-91 3
9.5.3 Maintenance Kit

We offer maintenance kit ASSY consisting of consumable parts and tubing parts shown below.
 Maintenance Kit SIL-20A/20AC (Part No. S228-45413-95)

Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
Part Part No. 3 SIL-20A Series Q'ty Remark
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
Needle seal PEEK 20A S228-42325-01 5 1
High-pressure valve rotor
Low-pressure valve rotor

S228-41310-92
S228-36923
5
3
1
1
9
Needle coating 20A S228-41024-93 3 1
Sample loop ASSY S228-45402-95 3 1 For 100 L injection
Plunger seal S228-35145 3 1
Suction filter SUS S228-45707-91 3 1
Fitting set 20A (1 PC) S228-45407-91 6 2 With PEEK Ferrule and male nut
Rinsing port cap set (without Set of 10 rinsing port caps

S228-48331-91 3 1
holes) (S228-47973-01)
Rinsing port cap set (with Set of 10 rinsing port caps

S228-48331-92 3 1
holes) (S228-47973-02)
Vial detection spring S034-01615-09 3 1
SIL-20A/20AC 9-37
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Maintenance Kit SIL-20AHT/20ACHT (Part No. S228-45413-96)

Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
Needle seal PEEK 20A S228-42325-01 5 1
High-pressure valve rotor S228-41310-92 5 1
Low-pressure valve rotor S228-36923 3 1
Plunger seal S228-35145 3 1
Rinsing port cap set (without Set of 10 rinsing port caps

S228-48331-91 3 1
holes) (S228-47973-01)
Rinsing port cap set (with Set of 10 rinsing port caps

S228-48331-92 3 1
holes) (S228-47973-02)
9-38 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
 Maintenance Kit for SIL-20A/20AC/20AHT/20ACHT (Part No.: S228-45413-97)

High-pressure valve rotors or plunger seals whose replacement interval is relatively long are not included.
Compatibility
1 XR only
2 XR, HT (UFLC)
4 HT (UFLC) only
5 20A/HT (UFLC)
6 20A
Needle seal PEEK20A S228-42325-01 5 1
Low-pressure valve rotor S228-36923 3 1
Fitting set 20A (1 PC) S228-45407-91 6 2 PEEK ferrule, male nut included
Rinsing port cap set (without

S228-48331-91 3 1 Set of 10
holes)
Rinsing port cap set (with

S228-48331-92 3 1 Set of 10
holes)
SIL-20A/20AC 9-39
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.6 Introduction to HPLC System

The Prominence LC (LC-20A) series components are for use with Shimadzu high performance liquid
chromatography (HPLC) systems, which are designed to provide high accuracy and high sensitivity analyses.
Example system configurations are provided below, along with descriptions of the operations of the various
components.
NO. Unit Model Name Q'ty
1 Reservoir bottle - 3 1
2 Reservoir tray - 1 3 2
3 Degassing unit DGU-20A3 1
4 Pump unit LC-20AD 2 4 0

5 Semi-micro mixer - 1
9
6 Autosampler SIL-20ACHT 1 4
Shim-pack
7 Column 1
VP-ODS
8
6
8 Column oven CTO-20AC 1
9 UV-VIS Detector SPD20A 1

7
0 System controller CBM-20A 1
a Waste container - 1
a
5
1 Mobile phase is drawn out of the reservoir bottles and pumped through the tubing by the pump.
2 It is the tray for reservoir bottles.
3 The degassing unit removes dissolved air from the mobile phase, preventing air bubbles and consequent
rise, drift or other baseline irregularities caused by dissolved air.
4 The pump sends the mobile phase through the mixer, autosampler, column and detector, in that order, and
finally into the waste container.
5 The mixer enhances mixing efficiency of the mobile phases.
6 The autosampler automatically injects the sample into the flow lines. By adding a Rack Changer II, it is
possible to automatically change the autosampler racks. Outlet stainless tubing is 0.3 mm ID and 1000 mm
length. Don’t cut the tubing, and connect by the male nut fitting.
7 In the column, the components are separated by means of the mutual interactions of the mobile phase and
the column packing (stationary phase).
8 The column oven adjusts the temperature of a column.
9 The detector detects the components eluted from the column, and sends the signal data to a Chromatopac
or PC. The semi-micro cell is attached to a detector as standard.
0 The CBM-20A system controller can control a maximum of 8 LC components (12 LC components as an
option) including a maximum of 4 pump units.
a Mobile phase from the detector drains into the waste container.
9-40 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
9.7 Mobile Phase Characteristics
9.7 Mobile Phase Characteristics

(7)
(1) Water (8)
Solvent Boiling Solubility Dielectric
(*) <.5cP, > 45 C (2) (3) (4) Point Viscosity (5) (6) %W in 20 C Constant (9)
(**) <.5cP, < 45 C Source UV Cutoff R.I.25 (C) (cP, 25 C) p' ea Solvent e20 p'+0.25e
210 nm p' and Dielect.

FC-78 (*) (LC 1.267 50 0.4 < -2 -.25 1.88 const
210
1 FC-75 (Fluorescent solvent) specific) 1.276 102 0.8 < -2 -.25 1.86 (Function
(opaque
FC-43 1.291 174 2.6 < -2 -.25 1.9 proportional
under 210)
to strength)
Isooctane(*)
2 (2,2,4-trimethylpentane) LC 197 1.389 99 0.47 0.1 0.01 0.011 1.94 0.1
3 n-Heptane(*) LC 195 1.385 98 0.40 0.2 0.01 0.010 1.92 0.5

4 n-Hexane(*) LC 190 1.372 69 0.30 0.1 0.01 0.010 1.88 0.5
5 n-Pentane(**) LC 195 1.355 36 0.22 0.0 0.00 0.010 1.84 0.5
6 Cyclohexane LC 200 1.423 81 0.90 -0.2 0.04 0.012 2.02 0.5
7 Cyclopentane(*) LC 200 1.404 49 0.42 -0.2 0.05 0.014 1.97 0.6
8 I-Chlorobutane(*) LC 220 1.400 78 0.42 1.0 0.26 7.4 2.8
9 Carbon disulfide LC 380 1.624 46 0.34 0.3 0.15 0.005 2.64 1.7
10 2-Chloropropane(**) LC 230 1.375 36 0.30 1.2 0.29 9.82 3.7
11 Carbon tetrachloride LC 265 1.457 77 0.90 1.6 0.18 0.008 2.24 2.3
12 n-Butyl ether 220 1.397 142 0.64 2.1 0.25 0.19 2.8 2.4
13 Triethylamine 1.398 89 0.36 1.9 0.54 2.4 2.4
14 Bromoethane(*) 1.421 38 0.38 2.0 0.35 9.4 4.3
15 i-Propyl ether(*) 220 1.365 68 0.38 2.4 0.28 0.62 3.9 3.2
16 Toluene LC 285 1.494 110 0.55 2.4 0.29 0.046 2.4 2.9
17 p-Xylene 290 1.493 138 0.60 2.5 0.26 2.3 3.0
18 Chlorobenzene 1.521 132 0.75 2.7 0.30 5.6 4.1
19 Bromobenzene 1.557 156 1.04 2.7 0.32 5.4 4.1
20 Iodobenzene 2.8 0.35
21 Phenyl ether 1.580 258 3.3 3.4 3.7 3.7
22 Phenetole 1.505 170 1.14 3.3 4.2 4.9
23 Ethyl ether(**) LC 218 1.350 35 0.24 2.8 0.38 1.3 4.3 4.0
24 Benzene LC 280 1.498 80 0.60 2.7 0.32 0.058 2.3 3.6
25 Tricresy phosphate
26 Ethyl iodide 1.510 72 0.57 2.2 7.8 4.2
27 n-Octanol 205 1.427 195 7.3 3.4 0.5 3.9 10.3 5.8
9
28 Fluorobenzene 1.46 85 0.55 3.1 5.4 4.6
29 Benzylether 1.538 288 4.5 4.1
30 Methylene chloride(**) LC 233 1.421 40 0.41 3.1 0.42 0.17 8.9 5.6
31 Anisole 1.514 154 0.9 3.8 4.3 4.6
32 i-Pentanol 1.405 130 3.5 3.7 0.61 9.2 14.7 7.3
33 1,2-Dichloroethane LC 228 1.442 83 0.78 3.5 0.44 0.16 10.4 6.3
34 t-Butanol 1.385 82 3.6 4.1 0.7 miscible 12.5
35 n-Butanol LC 210 1.397 118 2.6 3.9 0.7 20.1 17.5 8.3
36 n-Propanol LC 240 1.385 97 1.9 4.0 0.82 miscible 20.3
37 Tetrahydrofuran(*) LC 212 1.405 66 0.46 4.0 0.57 miscible 7.6
38 Propylamine(*) 1.385 48 0.35 4.2 miscible 5.3
39 Ethylacetate(*) LC 256 1.370 77 0.43 4.4 0.58 8.8 6.0 5.8
40 i-Propanol LC 205 1.384 82 1.9 3.9 0.82 miscible 20.3
41 Chloroform(*) LC 245 1.443 61 0.53 4.1 0.40 0.072 4.8 5.6
42 Acetophenone 1.532 202 1.64 4.8 17.4 8.7
43 Methylethyl LC 329 1.376 80 0.38 4.7 0.51 23.4 18.3 9.1
44 Cyclohexanone 1.450 156 2.0 4.7 18.3 9.1
45 Nitrobenzene 1.550 211 1.8 4.4 34.8 13.2
46 Benzonitrile 1.536 191 1.2 4.8 25.2 10.9
47 Dioxane LC 215 1.420 101 1.2 4.8 miscible 2.2
48 Tetramethyl urea LC 265 1.449 175 6.0 0.56 23.0 10.7
49 Quinoline 1.625 237 3.4 5.0 9.0 7.4
50 Pyridine 1.507 115 0.88 5.3 miscible 12.4
51 Nitroethane 380 1.390 114 0.64 5.2 0.9
SIL-20A/20AC 9-41
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
(7)
(1) Water (8)
Solvent Boiling Solubility Dielectric
(*) <.5cP, > 45 C (2) (3) (4) Point Viscosity (5) (6) %W in 20 C Constant (9)
(**) <.5cP, < 45 C Source UV Cutoff R.I.25 (C) (cP, 25 C) p' ea Solvent e20 p'+0.25e
Acetone(*) 1.356 56 0.30 5.1
52 LC 330 0.71 miscible 13.1 8.8
Benzyl alcohol 1.538 205 5.5 5.7
53 Tetramethyl guanidine 6.1 0.6
54 Methoxyethanol LC 210 1.400 125 1.60 5.5 miscible 19.9
55 Tris(cyanoethoxy)propane GC 6.6 0.56
56 Propylene carbonate LC 6.1
57 Ethanol LC 210 1.359 78 10.8 4.3 miscible 24.6
58 Oxydipropionitrile GC 6.8
59 Aniline 1.584 184 3.77 6.3 6.9 8.1
60 Acetic acid 1.370 118 1.1 6.0 miscible 6.2
61 Acetonitrile(*) LC 190 1.341 82 0.34 5.8 miscible 37.5
62 N,N-dimethylacetamide LC 268 1.436 166 0.78 6.5 0.88 37.8
63 Dimethylformamide LC 268 1.428 153 0.80 6.4 36.7
64 Dimethylsulfoxide LC 268 1.477 189 2.00 7.2 0.62 miscible 4.7
65 N-methyl-2-pyrolidone LC 285 1.468 202 1.67 6.7 32
66 Hexamethyl
phosphoric
1.457 233 3 7.4 0.65 30
acid triamide
67 Methanol(*) LC 205 1.326 65 0.54 5.1 miscible 32.7
68 Nitromethane 380 1.380 101 0.61 6.0 2.1
69 m-Cresol 1.540 202 14 7.4 11.8 10.0
70 N-methylformamide 1.447 182 1.65 6.0 miscible 182
71 Ethylene glycol 1.431 182 16.5 6.9 miscible 37.7
72 Formamide 1.447 210 3.3 9.6 miscible 111
73 Water LC 1.333 100 0.89 10.2 80
(1) An asterisk (*) indicates solvents most suitable for LC, with low boiling points (>45 C) and low viscosity
(<0.5cP).
Double asterisks (**) indicates solvents with a very low viscosity and boiling point.
(2) "LC" indicates that a grade of solvent specifically for LC is commercially available from companies like
the following:
Burdick & Jackson, Baker Chemical, Mallinckrodt Chemical, Fischer Scientifie, Waters Associate,
Manufacturing Chemists, Inc.
"GC" indicates that a solvent is used as a stationary phase for gas chromatography, and can be
purchased from companies selling GC columns and stationary phases. (These solvents are used as
stationary phase in liquid-to-liquid LC.)
(3) The wavelength below which the solvent becomes opaque.
(4) Refractive index at 25 C.
(5) Polarity parameter of solvent.
(6) Solvent's strength parameter in relation to liquid-to-solid adsorption in alumina.
(7) Water solubility (%W) at 20 C of solvent used in liquid-to -solid adsorption.
(8) Value at 20 C.
(9) Function consisting of P' (proportional to solvent strength) plus the dielectric constant, in ion
chromatography.
Source: A.M.Krstulovic and P.R.Brown, Reversed-Phase High-Performance Liquid Chromatography,

Wiley Interscience, 1982.
9-42 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Index
Index
A D
ADJUST INJ PORT ....................................... 5-59 DATE ............................................................. 5-59
ADJUST MTP ............................................... 5-59 Deep-well plate ............................................. 5-16
ADJUST RACK ............................................. 5-59 DEFAULT GATEWAY ................................... 5-60
Adsorption ..................................................... 1-19 DISP RACK STATUS .................................... 5-18
Amount of liquid left ...................................... 5-26 Display Panel .................................................. 2-2
ASP FACTOR ............................................... 5-59
AUTO EXCHANGE ....................................... 5-18
E
Autosampler validation .................................... 7-7
Auxiliary settings ............................................. 5-3 ERASE INJ.P ADJ ........................................ 5-59
ERASE MTP ADJ .......................................... 5-59
B ERASE RACK.P ADJ .................................... 5-59
ERROR LOG ................................................. 5-58
BEEP MODE ................................................. 5-17 ETHERNET SPEED ...................................... 5-60
Bracket sequence analysis .................. 5-16, 5-57 EVENT .......................................................... 5-16
BRIGHTNESS ............................................... 5-17 Event cable ................................................... 9-26
EXT PUMP .................................................... 5-59
EXT PUMP USED ......................................... 5-58
C
EXT RINSE TIME .......................................... 5-17
C TIME .......................................................... 5-17
Calibration support group .............................. 5-13 F
CANCEL DOORSW ...................................... 5-59
CANCEL RACKDET ..................................... 5-59 Flow line ........................................................ 7-22
CANCEL VIALDET ....................................... 5-59 Flow rate ....................................................... 5-16
CBM LINK ..................................................... 5-17 Fuse .............................................................. 8-37
CBM-20A ...................................................... 5-60 Fuse holder ..................................................... 2-4
CHANGE PASSWORD ................................. 5-59
Changing the plumbing ................................. 9-29
G
Clear RACK INFO ......................................... 5-18
Clear Rep Inj tbl ............................................ 5-17 Glass vial ....................................................... 1-19
Clear SMPTBL .............................................. 5-17 Grounding ..............................................VIII, 9-10
CNT RACK STRK ......................................... 5-17
Component validation ..................................... 7-2
Consumable parts ......................................... 9-34
H
Control settings group ..................................... 5-5
Hardware validation ........................................ 7-2
Control vial rack ............................................ 5-17
High-pressure valve rotor .............................. 8-21
Controller ...................................................... 9-23
HPV ROTATION ........................................... 5-58
COOLER TEMP ............................................ 5-16
HPV SEAL ..................................................... 5-59
CUT OFF LOOP ........................................... 5-17
HPV SEAL USED .......................................... 5-58
Cutting the tubings ........................................ 9-11
HPV TEST ..................................................... 5-17
SIL-20A/20AC Index-1
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Index
I Needle .................................................. 5-16, 8-35

Needle seal ..................................................... 8-5
INITIALIZE PARAM ....................................... 5-59 NEEDLE STROKE ........................................ 5-16
Input PASSWORD ........................................ 5-59 Needle’s rinsing method ....................... 5-16, 5-17
Installation of ambient temperature sensor (only C Needle’s rinsing time ..................................... 5-16
models) ......................................................... 9-25
Installation site ................................................ 9-2
O
Installation space ............................................ 9-3
INTERFACE .................................................. 5-60 OP MODE ..................................................... 5-59
IP ADDRESS ................................................ 5-60 OPERATION LOG ......................................... 5-58
Optical cable .................................................. 9-22
K
P
KEY CLOSE .................................................. 5-17
Panel F .......................................................... 8-39
L PARAMETER LOCK ..................................... 5-59
PART REPLACEMENT ................................. 5-58
LEAK SENSOR TEST ................................... 5-59 Parts replacement ......................................... 5-58
LEAK THR ..................................................... 5-59 PAUSE .......................................................... 5-17
Leaking ............................................................ 6-5 Periodic inspection and maintenance .............. 8-2
LED LIGHT .................................................... 5-18 Periodic validation ........................................... 7-3
List of auxiliary functions ............................... 5-16 Plastic vial ..................................................... 1-20
LOCAL .......................................................... 5-17 Plunger seal .................................................... 8-8
Low-pressure valve rotor ............................... 8-17 Polarity .......................................................... 1-20
LPV ROTATION ............................................ 5-58 POSITION SENS .......................................... 5-59
LPV SEAL ..................................................... 5-59 Power consumption .......................................... VII
LPV SEAL USED .......................................... 5-58 Power cord connector ..................................... 2-4
Power supply voltage ....................................... VII
Priority analysis ............................................. 5-17
M
Product information group ............................. 5-10
Maintenance information group ..................... 5-11 Protective plug ............................................... 9-15
MAINTENANCE LOG ................................... 5-58 P-SET ............................................................ 5-58
MANUAL PURGE ......................................... 5-17 PURGE TIME ................................................ 5-16
Manual syringe .............................................. 5-17 Purge time ..................................................... 5-16
MAX Inj. Volume ........................................... 5-17 PURGE (Ext Pump) ....................................... 5-17
Measuring pump plunger .............................. 8-13
MEMORY CHECK ........................................ 5-59 R
Microtiter plate ........................................ 4-4, 5-16
Mobile phase ...................................................XIV Rack Changer II ................................... 5-16, 5-51
Moving the needle ......................................... 8-49 Rack Changers II ........................................... 1-22
MTP ORDER ................................................. 5-16 RC INITIALIZE .............................................. 5-18
MTP WELL .................................................... 5-16 RC SERIAL NUMBER ................................... 5-58
RC STACK SCAN ......................................... 5-18
RC S/W ID ..................................................... 5-58
N
REMOVE DUMMY ........................................ 5-18
NDL SEAL USED .......................................... 5-58 REMOVE RACK ............................................ 5-18
NDLE FLUSH ................................................ 5-58 Repeat Inj Table ............................................ 5-16
NDLE SEAL .................................................. 5-59 Repeat injection table .................................... 5-53
Index-2 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Index
Replacement parts ........................................ 9-34 T

RINSE DIPTIME ........................................... 5-16
RINSE METHOD .......................................... 5-17 TEMP DELTA ................................................ 5-59
RINSE MODE ............................................... 5-16 TEST INJ PORT ............................................ 5-17
Rinse solution ........................................ 3-4, 9-16 TIME .............................................................. 5-59
RINSE SPEED .............................................. 5-16 TOTAL OP TIME ........................................... 5-58
RINSE VOLUME ........................................... 5-16 Troubleshooting .............................................. 6-2
Rinsing .......................................................... 4-14 TRS MODE ................................................... 5-60
Rinsing pump ....................................... 1-11, 5-17 Tubing .............................................................XIV
S U
Sample cooler ................................................. 4-5 USE GATEWAY ............................................ 5-60
Sample cooler temperature ........................... 5-16
Sample loop .................................................. 8-28
V
Sample rack ........................................... 4-2, 9-23
Sample solvent ............................................. 1-19 Validation support group ............................... 5-12
SAMPLE SPEED .......................................... 5-16 Vial ......................................................... 4-5, 9-23
Sample table ................................................... 4-7 Volume of rinse solution ................................ 5-16
SELECT EVENT1 ......................................... 5-17 VP function .................................................... 5-10
SELECT EVENT2 ......................................... 5-17
SELECT EVENT3 ......................................... 5-17
SERIAL NUMBER ....................... 5-58, 5-60, 5-62 W
Service life of consumables .......................... 7-22
Warning label ................................................XXIII
Shipping bracket ............................................. 9-4
Waste liquid ......................................................XV
SMALL ID VIAL ............................................. 5-17
Well ............................................................... 5-16
Small-capacity vial ........................................ 5-17
Software version ........................................... 5-62
STACK A CODE ........................................... 5-18 Z
STACK A STRK ............................................ 5-18
STACK B CODE ........................................... 5-18 Z HOME ........................................................ 5-17
STACK B STRK ............................................ 5-18
STACK C CODE ........................................... 5-18
STACK C STRK ............................................ 5-18
Stack code .................................................... 5-18
STACK D CODE ........................................... 5-18
STACK D STRK ............................................ 5-18
Stacking brackets ............................................ 9-7
STAT ............................................................. 5-17
Static electricity .......................................... X, XIV
SUBNET MASK ............................................ 5-60
Suction filter .................................................. 8-33
System controller .......................................... 9-23
System settings group .................................... 5-6
System validation ................................... 7-2, 7-14
S/W ID .................................................. 5-58, 5-60
SIL-20A/20AC Index-3
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT
Index
Index-4 SIL-20A/20AC
SIL-20AHT/20ACHT

228-90475V Sil-20a 20ac 20aht 20acht Im en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

228-90475V Sil-20a 20ac 20aht 20acht Im en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

228-90475V

Read this manual thoroughly before using this instrument.

Copyright • Copyright © 2004-2015 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved. This

© 2006-2022 Shimadzu Corporation. All rights reserved.

Original version is approved in English.

Warranty and After-Sales Service

10) Product movement or transportation after installation

Hardware Validation This is a contract under which a qualified Shimadzu-approved engineer

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Emphasizes additional information that is provided to ensure

 Installation Site Precautions

• High performance liquid chromatograph uses large

• Provide protective equipment near the instrument.

• Avoid installation sites that are exposed to corrosive

• The power supply voltages and power consumptions of this instrument

• To prevent electric shock and to maintain stability in

• Do not modify the cord in any way. Do not bend it

• When opening the doors, be careful not to pinch your

• Always wear protective gloves and protective

• Always wear protective gloves when handling

• Never use a cracked reservoir bottle.

• Do not use flammable sprays (hair sprays,

• Be careful not to apply liquid to office

• Before removing the inlet tubing, outlet tubing,

 Precautions for Instrument Inspection, Maintenance, Adjustment and Care

• Never remove the main cover.

• Replace fuses only with fuses of the proper type and

• Replacement parts must be of the specifications given in

• If any water gets onto the instrument, wipe it away

• Dispose of the waste liquid properly and in accordance

 During a Power Outage

Static Electricity Precautions

 Typical Cause of Static Electricity Accidents

Accumulation of static electricity If electrostatically charged liquid is allowed to accumulate in an electrically

spark Flammable organic solvent with

Floor covered with rubber, etc.,

 Preventing Static Electricity Accidents

Accessories for this measure

Preventive Measures for Static

Connect to ground terminal or

18 Liter metal can

Liquid's static will be conducted

Accessories for this measure

• Wear anti-static clothing and shoes.

Maintenance, Inspections, and Adjustment

Precautions for Mobile Phase Selection and Use

20 C C C Mixed with water.

20 A C C Mixed with water.

20 C C C Mixed with acetonitrile.

20 C C C Mixed with acetonitrile.

20 A A A Mixed with water.

20 A A A Mixed with water.

[High-pressure valve rotor]

Pressure PEEK rotor

20 A Mixed with water.

Pressure PEEK rotor

20 A Mixed with water.

20 A Mixed with acetonitrile.

20 A Mixed with acetonitrile.

20 A Mixed with water.

20 A Mixed with water.